3714 Kinnear Place
Saskatoon, SK
Canada
S7P 0A6
Ph: (306) 373-5505
Fx: (306) 374-2245 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
MPS MANUAL
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
Revision 6-E-030116
MAIN MENU
Metering Ñ
²Messages Ñ
Setup Ñ
Copyright 2016 by Littelfuse Startco
All rights reserved.
Document Number: PM-1130-EN
Printed in Canada.
Factory default password is 1111
New Password
See Section 4.3.6.
Motor Identification
Page ii
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
List of Figures........................................................................ iv
List of Tables ......................................................................... iv
Disclaimer ............................................................................... v
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
3
3.1
3.2
.
Introduction ..........................................................1-1
General.....................................................................1-1
MPS Features ..........................................................1-1
1.2.1 Protection .....................................................1-1
1.2.2 Control – Starting Methods ........................1-1
1.2.3 Metering.......................................................1-1
1.2.4 Data Logging ...............................................1-1
1.2.5 Inputs and Outputs ......................................1-1
1.2.6 MPS-OPI Operator Interface ......................1-2
1.2.7 MPS-RTD Module......................................1-2
1.2.8 MPS-DIF Differential Module ...................1-2
1.2.9 Communications Interface ..........................1-2
Ordering Information ..............................................1-2
Installation..............................................................2-1
General.....................................................................2-1
MPS-CTU Control Unit ..........................................2-1
MPS-OPI Operator Interface ..................................2-1
MPS-RTD Module ..................................................2-1
MPS-DIF Differential Module ...............................2-1
Earth-Fault CT’s ......................................................2-1
System Wiring .......................................................3-1
General.....................................................................3-1
Wiring Connections ................................................3-1
3.2.1 MPS-CTU Connections ..............................3-1
3.2.1.1 Supply Voltage...............................3-1
3.2.1.2 Current Inputs ................................3-1
3.2.1.3 Voltage Inputs ................................3-1
3.2.1.3.1 Direct Connection ........3-3
3.2.1.3.2 1-PT Connection ..........3-3
3.2.1.3.3 2-PT Connection ..........3-3
3.2.1.3.4 3-PT Connection ..........3-3
3.2.1.4 Digital Inputs..................................3-3
3.2.1.4.1 DC Operation ...............3-4
3.2.1.4.2 AC Operation ...............3-4
3.2.1.4.3 Combined AC and
DC Operation................................3-4
3.2.1.4.4 Tachometer
Input (HSI) ....................................3-4
3.2.1.5 Analog Input (AN IN) ...................3-4
3.2.1.6 Analog Output (AN OUT) ............3-4
3.2.1.7 PTC Input .......................................3-4
3.2.1.8 IRIG-B Input ..................................3-4
3.2.1.9 I/O Module Communication .........3-4
3.2.1.10 RS-485 Network
Communications .........................................3-4
3.2.2 MPS-OPI Connections and
Address Selection ........................................3-4
3.2.3 MPS-RTD Connections and
Address Selection ........................................3-5
3.2.4 MPS-DIF Connections................................3-5
3.2.4.1 Core Balance ..................................3-5
SECTION
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
PAGE
3.2.4.2 MPS Summation............................ 3-5
3.2.4.3 DIF Summation ............................. 3-5
3.2.5 Dielectric-Strength Testing ........................ 3-5
Operation and Setup ............................................ 4-1
General .................................................................... 4-1
MPS-CTU ............................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 LED Indication............................................ 4-1
4.2.2 Reset Switch ................................................ 4-1
4.2.3 Phase-CT Inputs .......................................... 4-1
4.2.4 Earth-Fault-CT Input .................................. 4-2
4.2.5 Voltage Inputs ............................................. 4-2
4.2.6 Motor Data .................................................. 4-2
4.2.7 Output Relay Assignment .......................... 4-2
4.2.8 Digital Inputs 1 to 7 .................................... 4-3
4.2.9 Tachometer Input (HSI) ............................. 4-4
4.2.10 Analog Output............................................. 4-4
4.2.11 Analog Input ............................................... 4-5
4.2.11.1 Metering only .............................. 4-5
4.2.11.2 Protection ..................................... 4-5
4.2.11.3 Synchronize to ASD .................... 4-5
4.2.11.4 Motor Speed ................................ 4-5
4.2.12 Starter .......................................................... 4-5
4.2.13 Protection .................................................... 4-5
4.2.14 Miscellaneous Configuration ..................... 4-5
4.2.15 Network Communications.......................... 4-5
MPS-OPI ................................................................. 4-5
4.3.1 General ........................................................ 4-5
4.3.2 Configuring the MPS-CTU for
OPI Operation ............................................. 4-5
4.3.3 Starter Control ............................................. 4-6
4.3.3.1 OPI Control .................................... 4-6
4.3.3.2 Local Control ................................. 4-6
4.3.3.3 Remote Control.............................. 4-6
4.3.4 Metering ...................................................... 4-7
4.3.5 Messages ..................................................... 4-7
4.3.5.1 Trip Reset ....................................... 4-7
4.3.5.2 Status .............................................. 4-7
4.3.5.3 Data Logging ................................. 4-9
4.3.5.4 Statistical Data ............................... 4-9
4.3.5.5 Emergency Thermal Reset ............ 4-9
4.3.6 Password Entry and Programming............. 4-9
MPS-RTD ............................................................. 4-10
MPS-DIF ............................................................... 4-10
Waveform Capture................................................ 4-10
Protective Functions ........................................ 5-1
General............................................................... 5-1
Overload ............................................................ 5-1
5.2.1 Thermal Model ....................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Locked-Rotor Times ............................... 5-4
5.2.3 Emergency Thermal Reset...................... 5-4
Overcurrent ........................................................ 5-4
Auxiliary Overcurrent ........................................ 5-5
Reduced Overcurrent ......................................... 5-5
Jam ..................................................................... 5-5
Earth Fault ......................................................... 5-5
Table of Contents
Page iii
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
SECTION
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
5.24
5.25
5.26
5.27
5.28
5.29
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
8
8.1
.
PAGE
Current Unbalance ............................................. 5-5
Phase Loss—Current.......................................... 5-6
Phase Reverse—Current .................................... 5-6
Undercurrent ...................................................... 5-6
Overvoltage ........................................................ 5-6
Voltage Unbalance ............................................. 5-6
Phase Loss—Voltage ......................................... 5-6
Phase Reverse—Voltage .................................... 5-6
Undervoltage ...................................................... 5-7
Underpower........................................................ 5-7
Reversepower ..................................................... 5-7
Power Factor—Quadrant 4 ................................ 5-7
Power Factor—Quadrant 3 ................................ 5-7
Underfrequency.................................................. 5-7
Overfrequency.................................................... 5-8
Starts per Hour/Time Between Starts ................. 5-8
Failure to Accelerate and Underspeed ............... 5-8
Differential Current Protection .......................... 5-9
PTC Temperature ............................................... 5-9
RTD Temperature .............................................. 5-9
Hot-Motor Compensation ................................ 5-10
Analog Input .................................................... 5-10
5.29.1 Protection .............................................. 5-10
5.29.2 Synchronize to ASD ............................. 5-10
5.29.3 Motor Speed.......................................... 5-10
5.29.4 Metering Only ....................................... 5-10
Starter Functions.............................................. 6-1
General ............................................................... 6-1
Starter Timing Sequences .................................. 6-4
Full-Voltage Non-Reversing Starter .................. 6-7
Adjustable-Speed Drive ..................................... 6-7
Soft-Start Starter ................................................ 6-7
Full-Voltage Reversing Starter .......................... 6-8
Two-Speed Starter.............................................. 6-8
Reactor or Resistor Closed-Transition
Starter .............................................................. 6-10
Slip-Ring Starter .............................................. 6-10
Part-Winding and Double-Delta Starters ......... 6-11
Soft-Start-With-Bypass Starter ........................ 6-12
Reactor or Resistor Open-Transition Starter .... 6-12
Two-Winding Starter ....................................... 6-12
Wye-Delta Open-Transition Starter ................. 6-12
Autotransformer Closed-Transition Starter ...... 6-13
Wye-Delta Closed-Transition Starter ............... 6-13
Theory of Operation ........................................ 7-1
Signal-Processing Algorithms ............................ 7-1
Power Algorithm ................................................ 7-1
Operator Interface (MPS-OPI) ........................... 7-1
RTD Module (MPS-RTD) ................................. 7-1
Differential Module (MPS-DIF) ........................ 7-1
Firmware Diagnostics ........................................ 7-1
Communications............................................... 8-1
Personal-Computer Interface ............................. 8-1
8.1.1 Firmware Upgrade .................................. 8-1
8.1.2 SE-Comm-RIS ........................................ 8-1
SECTION
PAGE
8.2 Network Interface .............................................. 8-1
8.2.1 RS-485 Communications........................ 8-1
8.2.2 DeviceNet Communications ................... 8-1
8.2.3 Ethernet Communications ...................... 8-1
8.2.4 Profibus Communications ...................... 8-1
9
Technical Specifications .................................. 9-1
9.1 Control Unit (MPS-CTU) .................................. 9-1
9.2 Operator Interface (MPS-OPI) ........................... 9-3
9.3 RTD Module (MPS-RTD) ................................. 9-3
9.4 Differential Module (MPS-DIF) ........................ 9-4
10
Warranty .......................................................... 9-5
Appendix A MPS-OPI Menu Map ........................... A-1
Appendix B MPS Set-Up Record ...............................B-1
Appendix C MPS Modbus Protocol ..........................C-1
Appendix D MPS A-B DF1 Protocol ........................ D-1
Appendix E Communications Database Table ......... E-1
Appendix F Register Formats .................................... F-1
Appendix G MPS Revision History .......................... G-1
Table of Contents
Page iv
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE
1.1
1.2
2.1
2.1.1
PAGE
Motor Protection System Block Diagram ..............1-3
MPS Ordering Information .....................................1-4
MPS-CTU Outline and Mounting Details .............2-2
MPS-CTU-XX-X1 Ring Terminal
Outline and Mounting Details ................................2-3
2.2
MPS-OPI Outline and Mounting Details ...............2-4
2.3
MPS-CTU with OPI Outline and
Mounting Details .....................................................2-5
2.3.1 MPS-CTU Ring Terminal with OPI Outline and
Mounting Details .....................................................2-6
2.4
SE-IP65CVR-M Weatherproof Cover Outline .. 2-7
2.5
SE-IP65CVR-M Weatherproof Cover
Installation.......................................................... 2-8
2.6
MPS-RTD Outline and Mounting Details .............2-9
2.7
MPS-DIF Outline and Mounting Details .............2-10
2.8
EFCT-1 Outline and Mounting Details ................2-11
2.9
EFCT-2 Outline and Mounting Details ................2-12
2.10 EFCT-26 and SE-CS30-26 Outline and
Mounting Details ...................................................2-13
2.11 SE-CS30-70 Outline and Mounting Details ........2-14
2.12 SE-CS30-4, -5, and -8 Outline and Mounting
Details ....................................................................2-15
3.1
Residual Phase-CT Connection ..............................3-1
3.2
Typical MPS Connection Diagram ........................3-2
3.3
Direct Connection ...................................................3-3
3.4
1-PT Connection .....................................................3-3
3.5
2-PT Connection .....................................................3-3
3.6
3-PT Connection .....................................................3-3
3.7
Digital Tachometer Input (HSI) .............................3-4
3.8
Address Selection Switch Detail ............................3-5
3.9
Two Examples of I/O Module Connections ..........3-6
3.10 MPS-RTD Connection Diagram ............................3-7
3.11 Core Balance Connection .......................................3-8
3.12 MPS Summation Connection .................................3-8
3.13 DIF Summation Connection ...................................3-9
4.1
Menu Example ........................................................4-1
4.2
Menu Symbols.........................................................4-1
4.3
MPS-OPI Interface ..................................................4-6
5.1
Class-20 Overload Curve ........................................5-3
5.2
Asymmetrical-Current Multipliers .........................5-5
5.3
Used I2t Bias Curve ...............................................5-10
6.1
Typical 3-Wire Control ...........................................6-3
6.2
Typical 2-Wire Control ...........................................6-4
6.3
Starter Sequence 1 ...................................................6-4
6.4
Starter Sequence 2 ...................................................6-4
6.5
Starter Sequence 3 ...................................................6-5
6.6
Starter Sequence 4 ...................................................6-5
6.7
Starter Sequence 5 ...................................................6-6
6.8
Starter Sequence 6 ...................................................6-6
6.9
Full-Voltage Non-Reversing-Starter
Connection ...............................................................6-7
6.10 Adjustable-Speed-Drive Connection......................6-7
6.11 Soft-Start-Starter Connection .................................6-7
.
FIGURE
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
6.19
6.20
6.21
6.22
6.23
PAGE
Full-Voltage-Reversing-Starter Connection .......... 6-8
Two-Speed Two-Winding-Starter Connection ..... 6-8
Two-Speed Constant- and Variable-TorqueStarter Connections ................................................. 6-9
Two-Speed Constant-Horsepower-Starter
Connection ............................................................... 6-9
Reactor or Resistor-Starter Connection ................ 6-10
Slip-Ring-Starter Connection................................ 6-10
Part-Winding and Double-Delta-Starter
Connections ........................................................... 6-11
Soft-Start-With-Bypass-Starter Connection ......... 6-12
Two-Winding-Starter Connection ........................ 6-13
Wye-Delta Open-Transition-Starter
Connection ............................................................. 6-14
Autotransformer Closed-Transition-Starter
Connection ............................................................. 6-14
Wye-Delta Closed-Transition-Starter
Connection ............................................................. 6-15
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE
3.1
3.2
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
5.1
5.2
6.1
6.2
PAGE
MPS-OPI Address Selection ................................... 3-4
MPS-RTD Address Selection ................................. 3-5
Output-Relay Functions .......................................... 4-2
Digital-Input Functions ........................................... 4-3
Analog-Output Parameters...................................... 4-4
Metering Display ..................................................... 4-8
Status Messages ....................................................... 4-8
Trip Time ................................................................. 5-4
Fault Duration Required for Trip ............................ 5-4
Start-Source Summary ............................................ 6-1
Starter Summary ...................................................... 6-3
Table of Contents
MPS Motor Protection System
Page v
Rev. 6-E-030116
DISCLAIMER
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Littelfuse Startco is not liable for contingent or consequential
damages, or for expenses sustained as a result of incorrect
application, incorrect adjustment, or a malfunction.
.
Table of Contents
MPS Motor Protection System
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL
The Littelfuse Startco Motor Protection System (MPS)
is a modular system with integrated protection, control,
metering, and data-logging functions. The Control Unit
(MPS-CTU) is the core module. It can operate as a standalone unit or with the Operator Interface (MPS-OPI), RTD
Modules (MPS-RTD), and Differential Module (MPSDIF). The CTU can be programmed using the OPI or the
communications network. Programmable inputs and
outputs provide a flexible hardware platform and custom
software can be easily loaded from a PC to the CTU’s flash
memory. The MPS block diagram is shown in Fig. 1.1.
1.2 MPS FEATURES
1.2.1 PROTECTION
Overload (49, 51)
Overcurrent (50, 51)
Earth fault (50G/N, 51G/N)
Unbalance (voltage and current) (46, 47)
Phase loss (voltage and current) (46, 47)
Phase reverse (voltage and current) (46, 47)
Jam
Undercurrent (37)
Failure to accelerate
Underspeed (14)
Overvoltage (59)
Undervoltage (27)
Underpower (37)
Reversepower (32)
Power factor (55)
Overfrequency (81)
Underfrequency (81)
PTC overtemperature (49)
RTD temperature (38, 49)
Starts per Hour (66)
Differential (87)
1.2.2 CONTROL—STARTING METHODS (1)
Non-reversing
Reversing
Soft start
Soft start with bypass
Adjustable-speed drive
Two speed
Wye-delta (open or closed transition)
Reactor (open or closed transition)
Resistor (open or closed transition)
Autotransformer
Part winding
Slip ring
Two winding
Double delta
(1)
Only three CT’s required for all starting methods.
Page 1-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
1.2.3 METERING
Line currents
Current unbalance
Positive-sequence current
Negative-sequence current
Earth-leakage current
Differential currents
Line-to-line voltages
Line frequency
Voltage unbalance
Positive-sequence voltage
Negative-sequence voltage
Power
Apparent, Reactive, Real, and Power factor
Energy
kWh, kVAh, and kVARh
Used thermal capacity
Thermal trend
Motor speed
RTD temperatures
Analog input and output
1.2.4 DATA LOGGING
Sixty-four records
Date and time of event
Event type
Line currents
Current unbalance
Earth-leakage current
Differential currents
Line-to-line voltages
Voltage unbalance
Thermal capacity
Thermal capacity used during starts
Start time
Analog-input value
Frequency
Power (P, S, Q, PF)
RTD temperatures
Trip counters
Running hours
Waveform Capture
5 seconds of pre-trip waveform data
16 samples per cycle
COMTRADE and CSV file generation
1.2.5 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Three ac-current inputs
Three ac-voltage inputs
Earth-leakage-current input
Seven programmable digital (ac/dc) inputs
24-Vdc source for digital inputs
Tachometer (high-speed pulse) input
4-20-mA analog input
4-20-mA analog output
PTC thermistor temperature input
Introduction
Page 1-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
Up to twenty-four RTD inputs
Five programmable output relays
Network communications
IRIG-B time-code input
SE-CS30-4 ............................. Current Sensor,
30-A-primary rating,
c/w Flux Conditioner,
95.0 mm (3.7”) window
SE-CS30-5 ............................. Current Sensor,
30-A-primary rating,
c/w Flux Conditioner,
130.0 mm (5.1”) window
SE-CS30-8 ............................. Current Sensor
30-A-primary rating,
c/w Flux Conditioner,
200.0 mm (7.9”) window
SE-CS30-26 .........................Current Sensor,
30-A-primary rating,
26 mm (1.0”) window
SE-CS30-70 ......................... Current Sensor,
30-A-primary rating,
70 mm (2.7”) window
1.2.6 MPS-OPI OPERATOR INTERFACE
4 x 20 vacuum-fluorescent display
Starter-control keys
Display-control and programming keys
LED status indication
Remote operation up to 1.2 km (4,000’)
Powered by MPS-CTU
1.2.7 MPS-RTD MODULE
Eight inputs per module
Individually selectable RTD types
RTD Voting
Solid-state multiplexing
Up to three modules per system
Remote operation up to 1.2 km (4,000’)
Powered by MPS-CTU
1.2.8 MPS-DIF DIFFERENTIAL MODULE
3-CT core-balance connection
6-CT summation connection
Remote operation up to 1.2 km (4,000’)
Powered by MPS-CTU
1.2.9 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
The standard network communication interface is an
RS-485 port with Modbus RTU and A-B DF1 protocol
support. In addition to the standard interface, network
communication options include DeviceNet™, Profibus,
Modbus TCP, and Ethernet/IP.
1.3 ORDERING INFORMATION
See Fig. 1.2 for MPS-CTU, MPS-OPI, MPS-RTD, and
MPS-DIF model numbers.
Phase CT’s ............................... Protection-Class CT’s,
Contact factory
Accessories:
SE-IP65CVR-M ................... Hinged Transparent OPI
Cover
SE-485-PP ............................ Port-Powered Serial
Converter
SE-485-DIN ......................... Serial Converter,
Industrial, 24 Vdc
Software:
SE-Comm-RIS ..................... PC Communication
Software(1)
SE-Flash ............................... Firmware Upgrade
Software(1)
(1)
Available at www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols.
Earth-Fault Current Sensors:
EFCT-1 ......................... Earth-Fault CT,
5-A-primary rating,
82 mm (3.2”) window
EFCT-1FC .................... Flux Conditioner for EFCT-1,
70 mm (2.7”) window
EFCT-2 ......................... Earth-Fault CT with
Flux Conditioner,
5-A-primary rating,
139 mm (5.5”) window
EFCT-26 ....................... Earth-Fault CT,
5-A-primary rating,
26 mm (1”) window
(All EFCT’s include 6 m (19.5’) of 22 AWG (0.33 mm2)
shielded cable.)
Introduction
Page 1-3
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MPS-OPI
MPS-CTU
CONTROL UNIT
6
SUPPLY
NOTE 2
1
L2
2
8
3
9
SPG
4
OUTPUT
RELAY 1
4 x 20 ALPHANUMERIC
DISPLAY
7
L1
SPGA
OPERATOR
INTERFACE
5
10
4A
OUTPUT
RELAY 2
LED INDICATORS:
OUTPUT
RELAY 3
START 1
G
REMOTE
Y
START 2
G
OPI
Y
TRIP
R
LOCAL
Y
ALARM
Y
RUN
G
STOP
R
11
12
PHASE
VOLTAGE
INPUT
VA
19
VB
18
VC
17
VN
20
13
14
1A
33 NOTE 1
5A
32
C
31
PHASE B
CURRENT
INPUT
1A
30 NOTE 1
5A
29
PHASE C
CURRENT
INPUT
1A
EARTH LEAKAGE
CURRENT
INPUT
26
25
S
24
23 NOTE 1
5A
22
C
21
+
I/O COMMUNICATIONS
- 57
-
58
1
4
2
3
STOP
RESET
ESC
ENTER
ADDRESS SWITCHES
MPS-DIF
DIFFERENTIAL
MODULE
+
53
-
52
+
41
-
42
POWER
TRIP
COM
43
IN1
44
SPG
G
14
PWR
G
15
COMM
Y
R
+
Y
0V
ERROR
9
1
8
5
7
C
PHASE C
DIFFERENTIAL
CURRENT
INPUT
LED INDICATORS:
LED INDICATORS:
ALARM
12-120 Vac/Vdc
DIGITAL INPUTS
5
0V
55
54
24 V DC
OUTPUT
+24V
56
+ 59
1A
CONTROL SELECT
START 1
START 2
OUTPUT
RELAY 5
60
27 NOTE 1
C
PTC INPUT
4-20 mA
ANALOG INPUT
16
28
5A
KEYPAD:
15
PHASE A
CURRENT
INPUT
C
OUTPUT
RELAY 4
R
IN2
45
IN3
46
IN4
47
IN5
48
IN6
49
0V
IN7
50
+
HSI
51
+24V
RESET BUTTON
-
12
10
13
18
15
17
16
39
40
62
61
+ 4-20 mA
- ANALOG OUTPUT
C
D
R
RTD 4
IRIG
SHIELD
C
D
R
C
D
R
RTD 3
OPTIONAL NETWORK
COMMUNICATIONS
RTD 2
37
36
35
RS-485 NETWORK
COMMUNICATIONS
SHIELD
RTD 1
C
D
R
1
5
5
4
C
PHASE B
DIFFERENTIAL
CURRENT
INPUT
11
+24V
I/O COMMUNICATIONS
6
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
1
2
5
1
C
PHASE A
DIFFERENTIAL
CURRENT
INPUT
MPS-RTD
RTD
MODULE
LED INDICATORS:
PWR
G
COMM
Y
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
R
D
C
SHIELD
R
D
C
R
D
C
SHIELD
R
D
C
RTD 5
RTD 6
RTD 7
RTD 8
ADDRESS SWITCHES
20
19
SPG
NOTES:
1. MPS-CTU RING TERMINAL MODELS HAVE NO
1-A INPUTS.
2. OUTPUT RELAY CONTACTS SHOWN WITH
MPS-CTU DE-ENERGIZED.
FIGURE 1.1 Motor Protection System Block Diagram.
Introduction
Page 1-4
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MPS-CTU33
32
31
5 A
1 A
A
30
29
28
27
26
5 A
1 A
B
PH AS E CURR ENT
25
24
23
5 A
1 A
C
22
20
V
N
21
5 A
1 A
19
V
A
18
V
B
17
V
C
VOLTAG E
EFCT
EARTH
LEAKAGE
I/O MODULE
AN
COMM
IRIG
IN
2
4
PTC
- V
- 0
+
+
+ S
+
H
V
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52
S
0
2
H
V
PTC
4
IRIG
AN IN
V
COMM
MPS-CTU
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
CONTROL UNIT
P OW E R
I/O MODULE
TRIP
-
Communications:
01 Standard RS-485.
®
&
Includes A-BÆ
ModbusÆ® Protocols
02
DeviceNetTMand
standard RS-485
03
ProfibusÆ® and
standard RS-485
04 Ethernet and
standard RS-485
ALARM
Options:
00 No Options
01
Ring Terminal
E R ROR
OPERATOR
INTERFACE
R E S ET
24 VDC
SOURCE
AN
OUT
COMM
S
H
35 36 37 39 40
+ +
DIGITAL INPUTS
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
O N N N N N N
M 1
2 3
4
5 6
43 44 45 46 47 48 49
41 42
I
H
N S
7
I
50 51
MPS-OPILITTELFUSE STARTCO
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
CONTROL
SELECT
MPS-OPI
TRIP
MAIN MENU
MAIN
MENU
Metering —Ñ
Metering
²Messages
Ñ
Messages —
Setup —Ñ
Setup
ALARM
REMOTE
START
2
OPI
LOCAL
-
Display:
01 Vacuum Fluorecent
Future Options:
00 No Options
RUN
START
1
STOP
STOP
ESC
ENTER
RESET
MPS-RTD-
-
Configuration:
01 8 RTD
Future Options:
00 No Options
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19
C D R S C D R C D R S C D R S
H
H
P
INP 8
INP 7
INP 6
INP 5
G
PWR
INPUT MODULE
MPS-RTD
COMM
CTU/
MPU
INP 1
INP 2
INP 3
INP 4
COMM
S
S
0
R D C H R D C R D C H R D C V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
2
4
V
18
MPS-DIF-
PWR
Configuration:
01 5/1 A Isolated Input
COMM
Future Options:
00 No Options
15 14
S
P
G
DIFFERENTIAL MODULE
MPS-DIF
CTU/
MPU
PHASE A
C
1
5
2
1
3
PHASE B
C
4
5
5
-
PHASE C
1
6
C
7
5
8
1
9
+
COMM 2
4
0
V - + V
10 11 12 13
Supplied Interconnect Cable:
3124A . . . . . I/O Module to MPS-CTU
Interconnect Cable,
4 m (13’) included with MPS-CTU,
MPS-RTD, and MPS-DIF
NOTES:
1. MPS-CTU TERMINAL BLOCKS ARE PRE-INSTALLED.
2 MPS-OPI TERMINAL BLOCK IS INCLUDED BUT NOT INSTALLED.
3. MPS-RTD AND MPS-DIF TERMINAL BLOCKS ARE NOT REMOVEABLE.
FIGURE 1.2 MPS Ordering Information.
Introduction
MPS Motor Protection System
Page 2-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 GENERAL
A basic Motor Protection System (MPS) consists of an
MPS-CTU and three customer-supplied current
transformers (CT's) for measuring phase current. For corebalance earth-fault detection, a 1-A, 5-A, EFCT-1, or
EFCT-2 CT is required. For the optional Ring Terminal
MPS-CTU, the 1-A connection is not available. The
residual phase-CT connection can also be used for earthfault detection. Voltage inputs do not require potential
transformers (PT’s) for system voltages up to 600 Vac. For
RTD-temperature
measurement,
up
to
three
MPS-RTD modules can be connected to the MPS-CTU.
For differential protection, an MPS-DIF module can be
connected to the MPS-CTU. The MPS-OPI provides an
operator interface for the MPS.
The MPS power-factor-corrected switch-mode power
supply is rated 65 to 265 Vac and 80 to 275 Vdc.
All modules can be mounted in any orientation.
2.2 MPS-CTU CONTROL UNIT
The Control Unit is configured for surface mounting.
Outline and mounting details for the MPS-CTU are shown
in Figs. 2.1 and 2.1.1.
2.3 MPS-OPI OPERATOR INTERFACE
Outline and mounting details for the MPS-OPI are
shown in Fig. 2.2. It is certified for use in Class I, Zone 2
and Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations.
The Operator Interface is configured for panel mounting
or it can be mounted on the MPS-CTU as shown in Fig.
2.3. The Operator Interface can also be mounted on the
MPS-CTU
ring
terminal
as
shown
in
Fig. 2.3.1 (surface mount only).
If an optional SE-IP65CVR-M is used, follow the
included installation instructions. See Figs. 2.4 and 2.5.
2.4 MPS-RTD MODULE
Outline and mounting details for the MPS-RTD are
shown in Fig. 2.6. The MPS-RTD will fit inside most
motor RTD-termination junction boxes and it is certified
for use in Class I, Zone 2 and Class I, Division 2 hazardous
locations. The MPS-RTD can be surface or DIN-rail
mounted.
2.5 MPS-DIF DIFFERENTIAL MODULE
Outline and mounting details for the MPS-DIF are
shown in Fig 2.7. The MPS-DIF can be surface or DINrail mounted.
2.6 EARTH-FAULT CT’S
Outline and mounting details for the EFCT-1, EFCT-2,
EFCT-26, and SE-CS30 series are shown in Figs. 2.8, 2.9,
2.10, 2.11, and 2.12.
Installation
Page 2-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
33 32
31
5A
1A
A
30 29
28
27
5A
1A
B
PHASE CURRENT
26
24
25
23 22
20
V
N
21
5A
1A
EFCT
EARTH
LEAKAGE
5A
1A
C
19
V
A
18
V
B
17
V
C
NOTES:
VOLTA GE
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (INCHES).
2. SHOWN WITH PLUG-IN TERMINAL BLOCKS INSTALLED.
I/O MODULE
AN
IN
IRIG 2 COMM
4
PTC
+ - V+ + SH - 0V
+ 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52
3. MOUNTING SCREWS M4 OR 8-32 PAN HEAD.
190.0
(7.50)
165.0
(6.50)
127.0
(5.00)
118.0
(4.65)
5.0
(0.20)
12.5
(0.49)
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52
S
0
2
H
V
PTC
4
IRIG
AN IN
V
COMM
I/O MODULE
MPS-CTU
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
CONTROL UNIT
TRIP
ALARM
ERROR
OPERATOR
INTERFACE
91.7
(3.61)
121.1
(4.76)
P OW E R
RESET
AN
OUT
COMM
S
H
35 36 37 39 40
+ +
24 VDC
SOURCE
41 42
DIGITAL INPUTS
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
O N N N N N N
M 1
2 3
4
5 6
43 44 45 46 47 48 49
I
H
N S
7
I
50 51
12.5
(0.49)
41 42
+ -
24 VDC
SOURCE
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
C I I I I I I I H
O N N N N N N N S
M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I
DIGITAL INPUTS
111.0
(4.37)
34 35 36 37 38 39 40
- - HS + V+ + V
COMM
AN
O UT
NETW ORK
165.0
(6.50)
RELAY OUTPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5.0
(0.20)
S
L L P
1 2 G
1 2 3 4
FIGURE 2.1 MPS-CTU Outline and Mounting Details.
Installation
Page 2-3
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
29
31
32
5 A
A
26
28
5 A
B
PHASE CURRENT
24
25
22
20
V
N
21
18
V
B
17
V
C
VOLTA GE
5 A
EFCT
EARTH
LEAKAGE
5 A
C
19
V
A
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (INCHES).
2. SHOWN WITH PLUG-IN TERMINAL BLOCKS INSTALLED.
IRIG
I/O MODULE
COMM
AN
IN
2
4
V
PTC
+ - + + SH - 0V
+ 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52
3. MOUNTING SCREWS M4 OR 8-32 PAN HEAD.
190.0
(7.50)
165.0
(6.50)
127.0
(5.00)
118.0
(4.65)
5.0
(0.20)
12.5
(0.49)
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52
S
0
2
H
V
PTC
4
AN IN
IRIG
V
COMM
I/O MODULE
MPS-CTU
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
CONTROL UNIT
TRIP
ALARM
ERROR
OPERATOR
INTERFACE
91.7
(3.61)
121.1
(4.76)
P OW E R
RESET
AN
OUT
COMM
S
H
35 36 37 39 40
+ +
24 VDC
SOURCE
41 42
DIGITAL INPUTS
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
O N N N N N N
M 1
2 3
4
5 6
43 44 45 46 47 48 49
I
H
N S
7
I
50 51
12.5
(0.49)
41 42
+ -
24 VDC
SOURCE
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
C I I I I I I I H
O N N N N N N N S
M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I
DIGITAL INPUTS
111.0
(4.37)
34 35 36 37 38 39 40
- - HS + V+ + V
COMM
AN
O UT
NETW ORK
165.0
(6.50)
RELAY OUTPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5.0
(0.20)
S
L L P
1 2 G
1 2 3 4
FIGURE 2.1.1 MPS-CTU-XX-X1 Ring Terminal Outline and Mounting Details.
Installation
(0.61)
MAX
15.5
97.5
(3.84)
42.0
(1.65)
71.0 MAX
(2.80)
98.0
(3.86)
CONTROL
SELECT
STOP
START
1
START
2
RESET
STOP
RUN
LOCAL
OPI
REMOTE
ALARM
TRIP
100.0 MINIMUM
(3.94)
13.7
(0.54)
PANEL-MOUNT CONFIGURATION
ENTER
ESC
MPS-OPI
MAIN MENU
MAIN
MENU
Metering —
Ñ
Metering
²Messages
Messages Ñ—
Setup —
Ñ
Setup
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
LITTELFUSE STARTCO
(7.56)
192.0
PANEL-MOUNT CLAMP
ADDRESS SWITCH
ACCESS COVER
CABLE TIE EYELET
PANEL THICKNESS
1.6(0.06) TO 4.8(0.19)
10.5
(0.41)
186.0
(7.32)
TERMINAL BLOCK
1.
2.
R4.0 MAXIMUM
(0.16)
6-32 x 0.38 PAN HEAD SCREW
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (INCHES).
SHOWN WITH PLUG-IN TERMINAL BLOCK INSTALLED.
NOTES:
16.0
(0.63)
165.0
(6.50)
40.0
(1.58)
82.5
(3.25)
SURFACE-MOUNT CONFIGURATION
38.0
(1.50)
Ø4.0(0.16)
2 REQ’D
Ø 43.2(1.70)
1.25” CONDUIT
KNOCKOUT
SURFACE-MOUNT DRILL DETAIL
PANEL-MOUNT CUTOUT
200.0 MINIMUM
(7.87)
92.0
(3.62)
192.0
(7.56)
MPS Motor Protection System
Page 2-4
Rev. 6-E-030116
FIGURE 2.2 MPS-OPI Outline and Mounting Details.
Installation
Page 2-5
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
33 32
31
5A
1A
A
30 29
28
27
5A
1A
B
PHASE CU RRENT
26
24
25
23 22
20
V
N
21
5A
1A
EFCT
EARTH
LEAKA GE
5A
1A
C
19
V
A
18
V
B
NOTES:
17
V
C
VOLTAGE
1. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES (INCHES).
2. THIS CONFIGURATION CANNOT BE PANEL MOUNTED.
3. SHOWN WITH PLUG-IN TERMINAL BLOCKS INSTALLED.
I/O MOD ULE
AN
2 COMM
IN
4
V
0 PT C
+ + HS - V
+ 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52
IRIG
4. MOUNTING SCREWS: M4 OR 8-32 PAN HEAD.
5. MAXIMUM DOOR SWING FROM OPI FACE 57.3 (2.26).
5.0
(0.20)
192.0
(7.56)
165.0
(6.50)
159.0
(6.26)
118.0
(4.65)
LITTELFUSE STARTCO
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
MPS-OPI
REMOTE
OPI
LOCAL
MAIN MENU
MAIN
MENU
Metering —Ñ
Metering
²Messages
Ñ
Messages —
Setup —Ñ
Setup
121.1
(4.76)
ALARM
RUN
STOP
STOP
ESC
ENTER
RESET
12.5
(0.49)
41 4 2
+ -
24 VDC
SOURCE
190.0
(7.50)
165.0
(6.50)
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
C I I I I I I I H
O N N N N N N N S
M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I
DIG ITA L INPU TS
111.0
(4.37)
35 36 37 39 40
- HS + + COMM AN
OUT
98.0
(3.86)
TRIP
RELAY OUTPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5.0
(0.20)
S
S P
L L
P G
1 2
G A
1 2 3 4 4A
FIGURE 2.3 MPS-CTU with OPI Outline and Mounting Details.
Installation
Page 2-6
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
31
32
5 A
A
29
28
5 A
B
PHASE CURRENT
26
24
25
22
20
V
N
21
18
V
B
17
V
C
VOLTAGE
5A
EFCT
EARTH
LEAKAGE
5 A
C
19
V
A
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES (INCHES).
2. THIS CONFIGURATION CANNOT BE PANEL MOUNTED.
I/O MODULE
AN
IN
IRIG 2 COMM
4
PTC
+ - V+ + SH - 0V
+ 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52
3. SHOWN WITH PLUG-IN TERMINAL BLOCKS INSTALLED.
4. MOUNTING SCREWS: M4 OR 8-32 PAN HEAD.
5. MAXIMUM DOOR SWING FROM OPI FACE 57.3 (2.26).
5.0
(0.20)
192.0
(7.56)
165.0
(6.50)
159.0
(6.26)
118.0
(4.65)
LITTELFUSE STARTCO
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
MPS-OPI
REMOTE
OPI
LOCAL
MAIN MENU
MAIN
MENU
Metering —Ñ
Metering
²Messages
Ñ
Messages —
Setup —Ñ
Setup
121.1
(4.76)
ALARM
RUN
STOP
STOP
98.0
(3.86)
TRIP
ESC
ENTER
RESET
12.5
(0.49)
41 4 2
+ -
24 VDC
SOURCE
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
C I I I I I I I H
O N N N N N N N S
M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I
DIG ITA L INPU TS
111.0
(4.37)
35 36 37 39 40
- HS + + COMM AN
OUT
190.0
(7.50)
165.0
(6.50)
RELAY OUTPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5.0
(0.20)
S
S P
L L
P G
1 2
G A
1 2 3 4 4A
FIGURE 2.3.1 MPS-CTU Ring Terminal with OPI Outline and Mounting Details.
Installation
Page 2-7
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
TO PREVENT UNAUTHORIZED ENTRY:
1. USE WIRE SEAL THROUGH HOLES IN
WEATHERPROOF COVER ASSEMBLY, OR
HOLE FOR
WIRE SEAL
2. SECURE WITH THE PLASTIC THREAD FORMING
SCREW SUPPLIED IN KIT.
250.0
34.0
(9.84)
(1.34)
(5.00)
127.0
BOTTOM VIEW
SHOWN
WITH
SEAL
SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN MILLIMETRES (INCHES).
2. SHOWN WITH WEATHERPROOF SNAPS CLOSED.
3. REFER TO PANEL-MOUNTING CUTOUT FOR PANEL MOUNTING DETAIL. SEE FIGURE 2.2.
FIGURE 2.4 SE-IP65CVR-M Weatherproof Cover Outline.
Installation
MPS Motor Protection System
Page 2-8
Rev. 6-E-030116
INSTALL O-RING INTO
GROOVE IN THE REAR
OF WEATHERPROOF
WINDOW
MPS-O
PI
INSERT OPERATOR INTERFACE THROUGH OPENING
OF THE WEATHERPROOF WINDOW, UNTIL IT
IS SECURELY NESTED TO THE BACK OF THE
DARK GREY PVC PANEL.
INSTALL O-RING INTO THE GROOVE IN THE REAR
OF WEATHERPROOF WINDOW ASSEMBLY.
INSERT ASSEMBLY INTO PANEL AND FASTEN WITH
THE HARDWARE PROVIDED.
FIGURE 2.5 SE-IP65CVR-M Weatherproof Cover Installation.
Installation
Page 2-9
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
CABLE-TIE EYELET
4 LOCATIONS
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19
C D R S C D R C D R S C D R S
H
P
H
INP 8
INP 7
INP 6
INP 5
G
INPUT MODULE
87.0
(3.43)
PWR
CTU/
MPU
COMM
INP 1
R
1
D
2
C
3
S
H
4
INP 2
R
5
D
6
MPS-RTD
2
4
S
0
V
D C H R D C V
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
INP 3
C
7
ADDRESS SWITCH
ACCESS COVER
R
8
INP 4
COMM
52.5
112.5
(4.43)
(2.07)
(0.50)
12.5
56.0 (NOTE 3)
(2.20)
1. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES
(INCHES).
(2.36)
60.0
NOTES:
2. MOUNTING SCREWS: M4 OR 8-32.
3. OVERALL HEIGHT WHEN MOUNTED ON
DIN EN50022 35-mm x 7.5-mm
TOP-HAT RAIL.
(0.57)
14.5
M4 OR 8-32 TAP
4. TERMINAL BLOCKS ARE NOT
REMOVABLE.
6.3
100.0
6.3
(0.25)
(3.94)
(0.25)
FIGURE 2.6 MPS-RTD Outline and Mounting Details.
Installation
Page 2-10
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
CABLE-TIE EYELET
4 PLACES
PWR
COMM
87.0
(3.43)
15 14
S
P
G
DIFFERENTIAL MODULE
MPS-DIF
CTU/
MPU
PHASE A
C
1
5
2
1
3
PHASE B
C
4
5
5
PHASE C
1
6
C
7
5
8
1
9
+
COMM 2
4
0
V - + V
10 11 12 13
52.5
(2.07)
56.0 (NOTE 3)
(2.20)
112.5
(4.43)
TOP
SIDE
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES
(INCHES).
2. MOUNTING SCREWS: M4 OR 8-32.
3. OVERALL HEIGHT WHEN MOUNTED ON
DIN EN50022 35-mm x 7.5-mm
TOP-HAT RAIL.
4. TERMINAL BLOCKS ARE NOT
REMOVABLE.
12.5
60.0
(2.36)
(0.50)
BOTTOM
14.5
(0.57)
M4 OR 8-32 TAP
6.8
(0.27)
100.0
(3.94)
6.8
(0.27)
MOUNTING DETAIL
FIGURE 2.7 MPS-DIF Outline and Mounting Details.
Installation
Page 2-11
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES (INCHES).
2. MOUNTING SCREWS: M4 OR 8-32.
3. PRESS MOUNTING FEET IN PLACE USING
INSTALLATION TOOL PROVIDED.
4. RoHS COMPLIANT.
5. EN 60044-1 COMPLIANT.
121.0
(4.76)
121.0
(4.76)
20.5
(0.81)
56.0
(2.21)
46.0
(1.81)
30.0
(1.18)
80.0
(3.15)
NOTE 2
M5 SCREWS
TOP
MOUNTING DETAIL
25.0
(0.98)
30.0
(1.18)
EFCT-1 EARTH FA ULT CT
600 V CLASS, INSULATION CLASS A
R
R
LR 53428
5.0 (0.20) Ø
RECESSED FOR
8-mm HEX NUT
1.0 (0.04) DEEP
22.0
(0.87)
EFCT - 1FC
FLUX
CONDITIONER
(OPTIONAL)
.0
82 23)
.
(3
69
(2.7 .8
5)
126.0
(4.96)
US
(5.43)
138.0 MAX
C
5.5
(0.22)
110.0
(4.33)
FRONT
5.5
(0.22)
56.0
(2.21)
SIDE
FIGURE 2.8 EFCT-1 Outline and Mounting Details.
Installation
Page 2-12
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES (INCHES).
2. MOUNTING SCREWS: M5 OR 10-32.
3. RoHS COMPLIANT.
4. EN 60044-1 COMPLIANT.
215.0
(8.46)
26.5
(1.04)
52.3
(2.06)
P
S1 2S2
P1
31.0
(1.22)
64.0
(2.52)
215.0
(8.46)
162.0
(6.38)
M5 OR 10-32 TAP
M5 SCREWS
TOP
MOUNTING DETAIL
31.0
(1.22)
25.0
(0.98)
EFCT-2 EARTH FAULT CT
600 V CLASS, INSULATION CLASS A
R
R
LR 53428
139.7
(5.50)
FLUX CONDITIONER
(INCLUDED)
BONDING
SCREW
215.0
(8.46)
US
5.0 (0.20) DIA
60.0
(2.36)
236 MAX
(9.29)
C
8.5
(0.33)
198.0
(7.80)
FRONT
8.5
(0.33)
SIDE
FIGURE 2.9 EFCT-2 Outline and Mounting Details.
Installation
Page 2-13
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
68.0
(2.68)
34.0
(1.34)
68.0
(2.68)
M4 OR 8-32 TAP
26.5
(1.04)
52.5
(2.07)
42.6
(1.68)
17.0
(0.67)
MOUNTING DETAIL
TOP
(0.43)
110.0 MAX
M5 SCREWS
25.0
(0.98)
26.5
(1.04)
SE-CS30-26
CURRENT SENSOR
R
R
LR 53428
US
4.0 (0.16) Ø
0
.
26
RECESSED FOR
7-mm HEX NUT
3.0 (0.12) DEEP
2)
7.0
.0
(1
58.0
(2.28)
(0.87)
34.0
(1.34)
72.0
(2.83)
C
5.0
(0.20)
5.0
(0.20)
52.5
(2.07)
FRONT
SIDE
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES (INCHES).
2. PRESS MOUNTING FEET IN PLACE USING
INSTALLATION TOOL PROVIDED (DETAIL ‘A’).
MOUNTING FOOT
INSTALLA TION
TOOL
3. MOUNTING SCREWS: M4 OR 8-32.
4. RoHS COMPLIANT.
5. EN 60044-1 COMPLIANT.
DETAIL ‘A’
6. SE-CS30-26 SHOWN.
FIGURE 2.10 EFCT-26 and SE-CS30-26 Outline and Mounting Details.
Installation
Page 2-14
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
121.0
(4.76)
121.0
(4.76)
20.5
80.0
(3.15)
56.0
(2.21)
46.0
(1.81)
30.0
(1.18)
(0.81)
NOTE 3
M5 SCREWS
TOP
MOUNTING DETAIL
25.0
(0.98)
(1.18)
30.0
SE-CS30-70
CURRENT SENSOR
R
LR 53428
R
126.0
69.
8
(2.7
5)
22.0
Ø 5.0 (0.20)
RECESSED FOR
8-mm HEX NUT
1.0 (0.04) DEEP
5.5
110.0
5.5
(0.22)
(4.33)
(0.22)
56.0
(2.21)
SIDE
FRONT
MOUNTING FOOT
INSTALLATION
TOOL
(4.96)
US
(0.87)
(5.43)
138.0 MAX
C
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES (INCHES).
2. PRESS MOUNTING FEET IN PLACE USING
INSTALLATION TOOL PROVIDED (DETAIL ‘A’).
3. MOUNTING SCREWS: M4 OR 8-32.
DETAIL ‘A’
4. RoHS COMPLIANT.
5. EN 60044-1 COMPLIANT.
FIGURE 2.11 SE-CS30-70 Outline and Mounting Details.
Installation
Page 2-15
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
C
D
H
G
J
14.0
(0.55)
72.0
(2.83)
F
TOP (COVER REMOVED)
MOUNTING DETAIL
NOTES:
SE-CS30-8
OUTLINE
1. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES (INCHES).
2. MOUNTING SCREWS: M5 OR 10-32.
3. RoHS COMPLIANT.
B
A
4. CE COMPLIANT.
DIMENSIONS
I
L
D
C
K
G
FRONT
1.7
(0.07)
E
FLUX
CONDITIONER
J
BOTTOM
SE-CS30-4
SE-CS30-5
SE-CS30-8
A
95.0 (3.74)
130.0 (5.12)
200.0 (7.87)
B
175.0 (6.89) 218.0 (8.78) 309.0 (12.17)
C
158.0 (6.22) 203.0 (7.99) 290.5 (11.44)
D
141.0 (5.55)
178.0 (7.01) 267.5 (10.50)
E
82.0 (3.22)
103.5 (4.07) 150.0 (5.90)
F
32.0 (1.26)
32.0 (1.26)
34.0 (1.34)
G
17.5 (0.69)
11.0 (0.43)
11.0 (0.43)
H
15.0 (0.59)
13.3 (0.52)
13.3 (0.52)
I
33.0 (1.30)
34.0 (1.34)
43.0 (1.69)
J
9.0 (0.35)
11.0 (0.43)
11.5 (0.45)
K
40.0 (1.57)
40.0 (1.57)
50.0 (1.97)
L
5.3 (0.21)
7.0 (0.28)
7.0 (0.28)
FIGURE 2.12 SE-CS30-4, -5, and -8 Outline and Mounting Details.
Installation
MPS Motor Protection System
Page 2-16
Rev. 6-E-030116
This page intentionally left blank.
Installation
Page 3-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
3. SYSTEM WIRING
3.1 GENERAL
A typical connection diagram is shown in Fig. 3.2. The
MPS-CTU provides the 24-Vdc supply for the peripheral
modules and it communicates with them using an RS-485
interface. The total length of the I/O communication
system must be less than 1.2 km (4,000’).
I/O
communications addressing supports up to three modules
of each type; however, the power supply in the MPS-CTU
will not support more than three I/O modules. An external
24-Vdc power supply is required if more than three
modules are used.
The MPS-CTU voltage inputs can be directly connected
to a system with line-to-line voltages up to 600 Vac. PT's
are required for system voltages higher than 600 Vac.
Input resistance of the voltage inputs is 3.4 M.
NOTE: The current and voltage inputs must be phase
sequenced A-B-C with correct polarity observed.
START1, START2, and STOP starter-control
commands can be issued through the digital inputs, the
network interface, or the MPS-OPI. Start, stop, and
interlock contacts can be wired to any of the programmable
digital inputs. The five programmable output relays can be
used for starting control, protection, and interlock
functions. Relay 5 is a solid-state, low-level output relay
not recommended for starter control. See Section 9 for
relay ratings.
3.2.1.2 CURRENT INPUTS
The MPS-CTU uses 1-A or 5-A CT’s for phase-current
measurement. The MPS-CTU Ring Terminal uses 5-A
CT’s for phase-current measurement.
To maintain
specified accuracy, phase CT’s should be protection class
and selected with a primary rating between 100 and 300%
of motor full-load current (FLA). Current threshold is a
function of full-load current and CT-primary rating as
defined by the following formula.
Current Threshold (%) = 1.5 x
CT Primary Rating
FLA
The Current Threshold is also used to determine when
the motor is in Run mode. Several protective functions are
only enabled when in Run mode. See Section 5.1 for a
description of Run mode.
For synchronous-motor applications, the CT-primary
rating should be selected such that the current threshold is
less than the idle current, typically less than 5%. All CT
inputs can withstand a common-mode voltage of 120 Vac
so that the MPS-CTU can be connected in series with other
CT loads. The connection diagram in Fig. 3.2 shows a
typical connection where the MPS-CTU is the only device
connected to the phase CT's. The MPS-CTU requires the
phase sequence to be A-B-C with correct polarity.
The Ip Threshold sets the current level where unbalance
protection becomes active. See Section 5.8.
A 1-A, 5-A, or sensitive CT is used for core-balance
earth-leakage measurement.
The MPS-CTU Ring
Terminal has no 1-A input. See Fig. 3.1 for the phase-CT
residual connection for earth-fault detection.
NOTE: The default configuration has no assignments for
digital inputs and relay outputs.
ØA
3.2 WIRING CONNECTIONS
3.2.1 MPS-CTU CONNECTIONS
The MPS-CTU CT-input terminal blocks accept 22 to 10
AWG (0.3 to 4.0 mm2) conductors. The remaining MPSCTU clamping blocks accept 24 to 12 AWG
(0.2 to 2.5 mm2) conductors. Terminal blocks unplug to
allow the MPS-CTU to be easily replaced.
The MPS-CTU Ring Terminal CT-input terminal block
accept a maximum ring width of 8 mm (0.315”). These
terminal blocks cannot be unplugged.
3.2.1.1 SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Derive supply voltage from the line side of the motor
controller or from an independent source. Connect supply
voltage to terminals 1 and 2 (L1 and L2) as shown in
Fig. 3.2. In 120-Vac systems, L2 is usually designated as
the neutral conductor. For direct-current power supplies,
use L1 for the positive terminal and L2 as the negative
terminal. Earth terminal 3 ( ).
Internal surge-protection devices are connected to
terminals 4 (SPG) and 4A (SPGA) to allow dielectricstrength testing. Terminals 4 and 4A must be connected
except during dielectric-strength testing.
The 24-Vdc I/O module supply (terminals 56 and 60)
can support three I/O modules. An external 24-Vdc supply
is required if more than three modules are used.
ØB
ØC
5
C
1
5
C
33* 32
31
30* 29
28
1
5
C
S
27* 26
1
25
24
1
5
C
23* 22
21
NOTE:
NOT RECOMMENDED FOR EARTH-FAULT TRIP
LEVELS LESS THAN 10% OF CT-PRIMARY RATING.
* MPS-CTU RING TERMINAL HAS NO 1-A INPUTS.
FIGURE 3.1 Residual Phase-CT Connection.
3.2.1.3 VOLTAGE INPUTS
For all input-voltage connections, the MPS-CTU
requires the phase sequence to be A-B-C with correct
polarity.
If voltage inputs are not used, connect VA, VB, and VC
to VN.
NOTE: A voltage input is required for line-frequency
metering.
System Wiring
NOTE 2
L2
L1
ALTERNATE
CONNECTION
SHOWN DOTTED
ØC
ØB
ØA
S
P
G
A
4
A
5A
1A
EFCT
EARTH
LEAKAGE
24 23 22 21
S 1 5 C
5
VOLTAGE
K1
SOLID
STATE
RELAY
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 131415 16
1
DIRECT
VOLTAGE
INPUT
20 19 18 17
V V V V
N A B C
RELAY OUTPUTS
4
2
3
LOWER TERMINALS
5A
5A
1A
1A
C
B
PHASE CURRENT
S
P
L L
G
1 2
1 2 3 4
5A
1A
A
33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
1 5 C 1 5 C 1 5 C
PHASE CT’S
2
4
V
S
H
COMM
0
V
AN IN
4-20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT
+ +
AN
OUT
PTC
35 36 37 39 40
COMM
S
H
OPERATOR
INTERFACE
I/O MODULE
20 mA
ANALOG
INPUT
RESET
ERROR
ALARM
TRIP
POWER
L2
S4
S3
S2
S1
STOP
START
I
N
1
DIGITAL INPUTS
I
I
I
I
I
N N N N N
2 3 4 5 6
I
N
7
H
S
I
+
2
4
V
5
ALTERNATE 24 VDC FIELD WIRING
OF DIGITAL INPUTS
TACH INPUT
S4
S3
S2
S1
STOP
START
K1a
DIGITAL INPUTS
24 VDC
SOURCE C I I I I I I I H
O N N NN N N N S
+ M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
UPPER TERMINALS
2. WIRE-CLAMPING OPTION
SHOWN. RING-TERMINAL
OPTION DOES NOT HAVE
1-A CT INPUTS.
CONTACTOR
STATUS
CONTACT
MPS-CTU
S
H
0
L
V
D
1 2 3 4
1. SEE FIGS. 3.8 AND 3.9
FOR RTD CONNECTIONS.
NOTES:
REAR VIEW
MPS-OPI
OPERATOR INTERFACE
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
C
O
M
K1a
41 42
24 VDC
SOURCE
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
CONTROL UNIT
TO COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK
L1
IRIG
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52
PTC
NOTE 1
MOTOR
-
CONTACTOR
K1
+
EARTH FAULT
CT
MPS Motor Protection System
Page 3-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
FIGURE 3.2 Typical MPS Connection Diagram.
System Wiring
Page 3-3
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
3.2.1.3.1 DIRECT CONNECTION
PT's are not required for system voltages up to 600 Vac
line-to-line. Connect the voltage inputs as shown in
Figs. 3.2 and 3.3.
ØA
ØB
ØC
ØA
ØB
ØC
VA
VB
VC
VN
19
18
17
20
FIGURE 3.3 Direct Connection.
3.2.1.3.2 1-PT CONNECTION
The 1-PT connection is shown in Fig. 3.4. Connect the
PT between phase A and phase B. The PT-secondary
voltage must be less than 350 Vac.
NOTE: The 1-PT connection does not allow detection of
voltage unbalance.
ØA
VA
VB
VN
VC
19
18
20
17
FIGURE 3.5 2-PT Connection.
3.2.1.3.4 3-PT CONNECTION
The 3-PT connection is shown in Fig. 3.6. The PTsecondary voltages must be less than 350 Vac. Since the
MPS-CTU measures line-to-line voltage, there is no
advantage in using a 3-PT connection over a 2-PT
connection.
NOTE:
This connection relies on PT primarymagnetization current for voltage balance. Do not connect
any other secondary loads.
ØA
ØB
ØB
ØC
ØC
VA
VN
VB
VC
19
20
18
17
VA
VB
VC
VN
19
18
17
20
FIGURE 3.4 1-PT Connection.
FIGURE 3.6 3-PT Connection.
3.2.1.3.3 2-PT CONNECTION
The 2-PT connection is shown in Fig. 3.5. The PTsecondary voltages must be less than 350 Vac. Connect the
PT secondaries in open delta.
3.2.1.4 DIGITAL INPUTS
Digital inputs 1 to 8 (terminals 44 to 51) are referenced
to COM (terminal 43). These inputs are isolated from all
other terminals and operate over a 12 to 120 Vac/Vdc
range. Inputs 1 to 7 have programmable functions. See
Table 4.2. Input 8 is a high-speed input (HSI) for a
tachometer sensor.
System Wiring
Page 3-4
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
3.2.1.4.1 DC OPERATION
Supply voltage for dc-input operation can be obtained
from the 24-Vdc source (terminals 41 and 42), or it can be
obtained from an external 12- to 120-Vdc supply.
The internal source is current limited at 100 mA and is
referenced to the analog output (terminal 40) and the I/O
Supply (terminal 56). Connect the “” terminal of the dc
source to COM and connect field inputs between “+” and
the digital-input terminals.
3.2.1.4.2 AC OPERATION
Inputs operate over a 12- to 120-Vac range. Connect the
ac neutral to COM and connect field inputs between line
and the digital inputs.
3.2.1.4.3 COMBINED AC AND DC OPERATION
If both ac and dc inputs are used, connect both the acsupply common and dc-supply “” to COM.
3.2.1.4.4 TACHOMETER INPUT (HSI)
A tachometer sensor can be used to provide motor-speed
measurement. Connect a logic-output PNP tachometer as
shown in Fig. 3.7.
+ 41
+24
PNP TACHOMETER
SENSOR
-
42
HSI
51
3.2.1.9 I/O MODULE COMMUNICATION
The I/O module communications interface (terminals 56
through 60) is used to support optional modules. The
connector labeled Operator Interface on the MPS-CTU top
panel is in parallel with terminals 50 to 56. It is used for
direct MPS-OPI mounting. See Section 2.3.
I/O module communication is based on the 2-wire multidrop RS-485 standard. Overall line length must not exceed
1.2 km (4,000’).
For line lengths exceeding
10 m (33’), 150- terminations are required at the cable
ends. See Fig. 3.9.
3.2.1.10 RS-485 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS
Terminals 35, 36, and 37 are used for the standard
RS-485 interface. See Section 4.2.15.
24 VDC
SOURCE
DIGITAL
INPUTS
COM
3.2.1.8 IRIG-B INPUT
Terminals 61 and 62 are used for an IRIG-B time-code
signal. When an IRIG-B signal is detected, the real-time
clock (RTC) synchronizes with it. The user must set the
MPS date value because the IRIG-B day-of-the-year
parameter is not supported.
If the time-code generator does not have a local-time
adjustment, the IRIG Offset set points can be used to adjust
the hour and minute values so that the MPS will read local
time.
43
FIGURE 3.7 Digital Tachometer Input (HSI).
3.2.1.5 ANALOG INPUT (AN IN)
The analog input (terminal 52 and 53) is a 4-20-mA
current input with a 100- input impedance.
NOTE: The analog input is referenced to an internal supply
with 100-k resistors. Maximum common-mode voltage
is ± 5 Vdc with respect to MPS-CTU terminal 4.
3.2.1.6 ANALOG OUTPUT (AN OUT)
The analog output is a self-powered current-source
output. The current source output is the “+” (terminal 39)
and the common is “” (terminal 40).
NOTE: The analog output (terminal 40) is internally
referenced to the 24-Vdc source (terminal 42) and the I/O
supply (terminal 56).
3.2.2 MPS-OPI CONNECTIONS AND ADDRESS SELECTION
Connect the MPS-OPI to the MPS-CTU using shielded
cable (Belden 3124A or equivalent). The 24-Vdc supply
for the MPS-OPI is provided by the MPS-CTU. The cable
shield must be connected at both ends so that
MPS-OPI transient protection is operational. See Fig. 3.9.
The MPS-OPI has two switches to select its network
address. See Figs. 2.2 and 3.8. Up to three MPS-OPI
modules can be connected to the I/O MODULE bus, and
each active OPI must have a unique address. If one OPI is
used, address 1 must be used. If two OPI's are used,
addresses 1 and 2 must be used. If three OPI's are used,
addresses 1, 2, and 3 must be used.
Table 3.1 and Fig. 3.8 shows the addressing selection
format.
TABLE 3.1 MPS-OPI ADDRESS SELECTION
SWITCH 1
SWITCH 2
ADDRESS
0
(Factory Test)
1
(First OPI)
2
(Second OPI)
3
(Third OPI)
Open
Open
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
3.2.1.7 PTC INPUT
Terminals 54 and 55 are provided for PTC overtemperature protection. See Section 9 for specifications.
System Wiring
MPS Motor Protection System
1
2
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
3.2.4.1 CORE BALANCE
The core-balance connection is shown in Fig. 3.11. To
minimize power-cable and CT-lead length, both the
differential CT’s and the MPS-DIF can be located near the
motor. The primary rating of the differential CT does not
have to match the phase-CT primary rating and is usually
selected with a lower ratio resulting in more sensitive
differential protection. The core-balance method avoids
CT-matching issues and is the preferred connection.
OPEN
FIGURE 3.8 Address Selection Switch Detail.
3.2.3 MPS-RTD CONNECTIONS AND ADDRESS SELECTION
MPS-RTD terminal blocks accept 24 to 12 AWG
(0.2 to 2.5 mm2) conductors.
Connect the MPS-RTD to the MPS-CTU using the fourconductor shielded cable (Belden 3124A or equivalent) as
shown in Fig. 3.9. The MPS-CTU 24-Vdc supply can
power up to three MPS-RTD modules.
Connect RTD’s to the MPS-RTD as shown in Fig 3.9.
When the RTD module is installed in a motor junction box,
RTD-lead shielding is not required.
Connect the surge-protection (SPG) terminal 20 to
terminal 19 ( ), and earth terminal 19.
The MPS-RTD has two switches to select its network
address. See Figs. 3.8 and 3.10. Up to three MPS-RTD
modules can be connected to the I/O MODULE bus, and
each RTD-module address must be unique. If one module
is used, address 1 must be used. If two RTD modules are
used, addresses 1 and 2 must be used. If three RTD
modules are used, addresses 1, 2, and 3 must be used.
Table 3.2 shows the addressing selection format.
TABLE 3.2 MPS-RTD ADDRESS SELECTION
SWITCH 1
SWITCH 2
ADDRESS
0
(Offline)
1
(First RTD Module)
2
(Second RTD Module)
3
(Third RTD Module)
Page 3-5
Rev. 6-E-030116
Open
Open
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
3.2.4.2 MPS SUMMATION
The MPS summation connection uses three phase CT’s
and three differential CT’s as shown in Fig. 3.12. Both CT
ratio and CT-saturation characteristics must be matched to
avoid differential currents under motor starting and
running conditions. The MPS-DIF module should be
located near the MPS-CTU to minimize CT wire length. It
is preferred to use three dedicated phase CT’s and three
core-balance differential CT’s as described in Section
3.2.4.1.
For the delta connection, the MPS FLA Rating is set
equal to the motor’s full-load current multiplied by 3.
Power, power factor and energy measurements are not
correct for the delta connection.
3.2.4.3 DIF SUMMATION
The DIF summation connection uses six differential
CT’s as shown in Fig. 3.13. Both CT-ratio and CTsaturation characteristics must be matched to avoid
differential currents under motor starting and running
conditions. It is preferred to use three core-balance CT’s
as described in Section 3.2.4.1. This six CT connection
allows the CT’s and MPS-DIF to be placed near the motor
to minimize power-cable and CT-lead length.
3.2.5 DIELECTRIC-STRENGTH TESTING
Dielectric-strength testing should be performed only on
CT inputs, PT inputs, output relays, and digital inputs.
Unplug all other I/O and remove the SPG connection
(terminal 4 to terminal 4A) on the MPS-CTU during
dielectric-strength testing.
3.2.4 MPS-DIF CONNECTIONS
The MPS-DIF CT-input terminal blocks accept 22 to 10
AWG (0.3 to 4.0 mm2) conductors. The remaining MPSDIF clamping blocks accept 24 to 12 AWG (0.2 to 2.5
mm2) conductors.
Connect the MPS-DIF to the MPS-CTU using fourconductor shielded cable (Belden 3124A or equivalent) as
shown in Fig. 3.9.
Connect the surge-protection (SPG) terminal 15 to
terminal 14 ( ), and earth terminal 14.
System Wiring
Page 3-6
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
a)
RED
60
59
MPS-CTU
57
CONTROL UNIT
5
+
GREEN
+
-
WHITE
-
Rt
58
BLACK
56
MPS-OPI
4
OPERATOR
INTERFACE
2
3
3
1
RED
18
GREEN
+
17
WHITE
-
16
MPS-RTD
RTD
MODULE
11
BLACK
15
19
+
20
10
Rt
13
b)
RED
60
59
MPS-CTU
57
CONTROL UNIT
58
3
+
-
Rt
DIFFERENTIAL
MODULE
14
15
5
GREEN
+
WHITE
-
4
MPS-OPI
2
OPERATOR
INTERFACE
3
BLACK
MPS-DIF
11
12
1
56
BLACK
NOTES:
1. INTERCONNECT CABLE BELDEN 3124A
OR EQUIVALENT.
WHITE
GREEN
+
15
MPS-RTD
16
RTD
MODULE
17
11
RED
18
19
2. Rt = 150 OHMS, 1/4 WATT. REQUIRED
FOR LINE LENGTHS EXCEEDING 10 M (33’).
13
+
-
3. CONNECT CABLE SHIELD ON BOTH ENDS
FOR OPI INSTALLATIONS.
20
Rt
MPS-DIF
12
11
10
DIFFERENTIAL
MODULE
14
15
FIGURE 3.9 Two Examples of I/O Module Connections.
System Wiring
Page 3-7
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
3-WIRE RTD
CONNECTION
tO
tO
tO
tO
tO
S C D R
H
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19
C D R S C D R C D R S C D R S
H
P
H
INP 8
INP 7
INP 6
INP 5
G
INPUT MODULE
MPS-RTD
CTU/
MPU
COMM
tO
tO
WHITE
GREEN
BLACK
COMM
INP 1
INP 2
INP 3
INP 4
S
S
0
R D C H R D C R D C H R D C V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
2
4
V
18
RED
PWR
REMOVE ACCESS COVER
TO ACCESS ADDRESS
SELECTION SWITCHES
INP 5
ALTERNATE
2-WIRE RTD
CONNECTION
tO
tO
WHITE
BLACK
RED
GREEN
INTERCONNECT CABLE
BELDEN 3124A OR EQUIVALENT
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52
S
0
2
H
V
PTC
4
IRIG
AN IN
V
COMM
I/O MODULE
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
CONTROL UNIT
MPS-CTU
P OW E R
TRIP
ALARM
ERROR
OPERATOR
INTERFACE
RESET
AN
OUT
COMM
S
H
35 36 37 39 40
+ +
24 VDC
SOURCE
41 42
DIGITAL INPUTS
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
O N N N N N N
M 1
2 3
4
5 6
43 44 45 46 47 48 49
I
H
N S
7
I
50 51
FIGURE 3.10 MPS-RTD Connection Diagram.
System Wiring
Page 3-8
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
ØA
1
4
MOTOR
ØB
2
5
ØC
3
6
1
5
C
1
5
C
1
5
C
1
5
C
1
5
C
1
5
C
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
MPS-CTU
MPS-DIF
NOTE 1
CONNECTIONS:
WYE: ØA & 1, ØB & 2, ØC & 3, 4 & 5 & 6
DELTA: ØA & 1 & 6, ØB & 2 & 4, ØC & 3 & 5
NOTES:
1. RING-TERMINAL OPTION DOES NOT INCLUDE 1-A INPUTS.
FIGURE 3.11 Core Balance Connection.
ØA
1
4
MOTOR
ØB
2
5
ØC
3
6
1
5
C
1
5
C
1
5
C
1
5
C
1
5
C
1
5
C
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
MPS-CTU
CONNECTIONS:
MPS-DIF
NOTE 1
WYE: ØA & 1, ØB & 2, ØC & 3, 4 & 5 & 6
DELTA: ØA & 1 & 6, ØB & 2 & 4, ØC & 3 & 5
NOTES:
1. RING-TERMINAL OPTION DOES NOT INCLUDE 1-A INPUTS.
FIGURE 3.12 MPS Summation Connection.
System Wiring
Page 3-9
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
ØA
1
4
MOTOR
1
5
C
1
5
C
1
5
C
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
ØB
2
5
ØC
3
6
MPS-CTU
NOTE 1
CONNECTIONS:
WYE: ØA & 1, ØB & 2, ØC & 3, 4 & 5 & 6
DELTA: ØA & 1 & 6, ØB & 2 & 4, ØC & 3 & 5
NOTES:
1
5
C
1
5
C
1
5
C
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
MPS-DIF
1. RING-TERMINAL OPTION DOES NOT INCLUDE 1-A INPUTS.
FIGURE 3.13 DIF Summation Connection.
System Wiring
MPS Motor Protection System
Page 3-10
Rev. 6-E-030116
This page intentionally left blank.
System Wiring
Page 4-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
4. OPERATION AND SETUP
4.1 GENERAL
The MPS-CTU can operate independently. It can also
operate in conjunction with network communications, the
MPS-OPI, MPS-RTD and the MPS-DIF. All settings are
stored in the MPS-CTU and can be accessed using the OPI
or the network communications interface.
Use
SE-Comm-RIS software and an SE-485PP or SE-485-DIN
serial converter to program with a personal computer.
In the following sections, menu items and setup
parameters are listed in italics and are shown in the format
displayed on the OPI. The OPI cannot display subscripts
and superscripts.
Menu selection is in the following format:
Menu 1 | Sub Menu 1 | Sub Menu 2 | Sub Menu 3 |……
Example: For the menu item shown in Fig. 4.1, the
notation is Setup | System Ratings | CT Primary
Metering
Messages
Setup
Protection
System Ratings
Starter
•
•
•
CT Primary
EF-CT-Primary
System Voltage
Input Voltage
•
•
•
FIGURE 4.1 Menu Example.
Fig. 4.2 shows the symbols that assist in navigating the
menu system and how these symbols relate to the arrow
keys on the MPS-OPI. See the menu map in Appendix A.
4.2 MPS-CTU
4.2.1 LED INDICATION
The four LED’s on the MPS-CTU indicate POWER
(green), TRIP (red), ALARM (yellow), and ERROR (red).
The POWER LED is ON when supply voltage is present.
The TRIP and ALARM LED’s indicate a trip or alarm
condition. The ERROR LED is ON during firmware
updates or when there is an MPS-CTU failure.
4.2.2 RESET SWITCH
The reset switch is used to simultaneously reset all trips.
Trips cannot be held off by a maintained closure.
4.2.3 PHASE-CT INPUTS
OPI Menu: Setup | System Ratings | CT Primary
The setting range for the CT-primary rating is 1 to
5,000 A. To maintain specified accuracy, phase CT’s
should be selected with a primary rating between 100 and
300% of motor full-load current.
Current unbalance will indicate “” if the current
sequence is B-A-C. If B-A-C sequence is indicated,
correct the CT connections so that power measurements
will be valid.
NOTE: B-A-C sequence will cause a trip if current phasereverse protection is enabled.
NOTE: Phase-unbalance and phase-loss testing requires
three-phase inputs to the MPS.
These symbols indicate the
menu level. Up to five
submenu-level symbols may
be displayed. Use left arrow
key or ESC to move back one
Cursor indicates selected
menu item and shape
indicates available
scrolling directions.
Indicates top of list. Scroll
using down arrow key.
Scroll using up or down
arrow keys.
Indicates bottom of list.
Scroll using up arrow key.
¬¬¬¬¬ TITLE
Indicates that there are related
data displays to the left or right of
this display. Use left or right arrow
keys to view adjacent data
„
½ MENU ITEM 1 Ñ
Use right arrow key
to select submenu.
² MENU ITEM 2 ¼
« M E N U I T E M 3 x*
Indicates this starter
selection uses two FLA
settings.
Use right arrow key
to display data.
Indicates chosen
item in list-type
set-point displays.
FIGURE 4.2 Menu Symbols.
Operation and Setup
Page 4-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
4.2.4 EARTH-FAULT-CT INPUT
OPI Menu: Setup | System Ratings | EF-CT Primary
The setting range for the earth-fault-CT-primary rating
is 1 to 5,000 A. The CT-primary rating is 5 A for sensitive
CT’s—EFCT-1 and EFCT-2.
starting functions to control the motor-starter contactor(s).
See Section 6. Contactor status can be monitored using
auxiliary contacts and the digital inputs. See Section 4.2.8
and Figs. 6.9 to 6.23.
TABLE 4.1 OUTPUT-RELAY FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION
ASSIGNMENT OR ACTION
4.2.5 VOLTAGE INPUTS
OPI Menu: Setup | System Ratings
Select the voltage-connection type (1 PT line-line, 2 PT
line-line, 3 PT line-neutral/direct) to enable voltagemeasuring functions. System Voltage is the system line-toline voltage. The system voltage range is 120 V to 25 kV.
For the 1-PT and 2-PT connections, Input Voltage is the
PT-secondary voltage when system voltage is applied. For
the 3-PT connection, the Input Voltage is the PT-secondary
line-to-line voltage. For the direct connection, set Input
Voltage the same as the System Voltage setting. In all
cases, line-to-line voltages are displayed.
Voltage unbalance will indicate “” if the voltage
sequence is B-A-C. If B-A-C sequence is indicated,
correct the PT connections so that power measurements
will be valid.
Starter RLYA
Starter RLYB
Starter RLYC
Starter RLYD
Trip1
Trip1 Pulse (1)
Trip2
NOTE: The 1-PT connection does not allow detection of
voltage unbalance.
Trip3
NOTE: B-A-C sequence will cause a trip if voltage phasereverse protection is enabled.
Alarm1
4.2.6 MOTOR DATA
OPI Menu: Setup | System Ratings
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection Overload
Motor data must be entered for the FLA Rating,
Frequency, and Service Factor. If a tachometer is used, the
Sync Speed is required. If the starter selected requires two
FLA ratings, FLA Rating 2 must be entered.
The Frequency setting determines the sampling rate
used by the MPS for current and voltage measurements. If
Sync to ASD is selected as the analog-input type, the
Frequency setting is not used and the analog output from
an adjustable-speed drive determines the sampling rate
used by current- and voltage-measuring algorithms. See
Section 5.29.2.
Locked-rotor current, cold locked-rotor time, and hot
locked-rotor time must be entered in the Protection |
Overload menu to provide customized overload protection.
See Section 5.2.
4.2.7 OUTPUT RELAY ASSIGNMENT
OPI Menu: Setup | Relay Outputs | Relay x
Each of the five output relays can be assigned to one of
the functions listed in Table 4.1. More than one relay can
be assigned the same function. Note that Relay 5 is a solidstate relay with a low current rating and should only be
used for interlocks or annunciation.
Relay assignments Starter RLYA, Starter RLYB, Starter
RLYC, and Starter RLYD operate in conjunction with MPS
Alarm2
Alarm3
Local
Interlock
Current
Run Mode
Sequence
Complete
Start Inhibit
Watchdog
Reduced OC
None (2)
(1)
(2)
Relay is assigned to the Starter Relay A
function.
Relay is assigned to the Starter Relay B
function.
Relay is assigned to the Starter Relay C
function.
Relay is assigned to the Starter Relay D
function.
Relay operates when a trip occurs in a
protective function assigned Trip1, Trip1&2,
Trip1&3, or Trip1,2,&3. Fail-safe or non-failsafe mode selection is active.
Trip1 energizes the relay for the time duration
specified by the RY Pulse Time set point.
Relay operates when a trip occurs in a
protective function assigned Trip2, Trip1&2,
Trip2&3, or Trip1,2,&3. Fail-safe or non-failsafe mode selection is active.
Relay operates when a trip occurs in a
protective function assigned Trip3, Trip1&3,
Trip2&3, or Trip1,2,&3. Fail-safe or non-failsafe mode selection is active.
Relay operates when an alarm occurs in a
protective function assigned Alarm1,
Alarm1&2, Alarm1&3, or Alarm1,2,&3. Failsafe or non-fail-safe mode selection is active.
Relay operates when an alarm occurs in a
protective function assigned Alarm2,
Alarm1&2, Alarm2&3, or Alarm1,2,&3. Failsafe or non-fail-safe mode selection is active.
Relay operates when an alarm occurs in a
protective function assigned Alarm3,
Alarm1&3, Alarm2&3, or Alarm1,2,&3. Failsafe or non-fail-safe mode selection is active.
Relay energized when Local starter control is
selected.
Relay is energized when all digital-input
interlocks are completed.
Relay is energized when current is detected.
Relay is energized when motor is running.
(Current <125% for Run-Mode Delay)
Relay is energized when the starter
Start Time has elapsed.
Relay is energized when in an I2t or
starts-per-hour inhibit condition.
Relay is energized when the supply voltage is
applied and the MPS is operating properly.
Relay is energized when in maintenance mode
(ROC = On).
No Assignment (Default).
Assign this function to only one relay. Non-fail-safe
operation only.
Relay outputs must be assigned. Default is None.
Operation and Setup
Page 4-3
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
When a trip occurs, all assigned starter-control relays
(Starter RLYA to Starter RLYD) are de-energized and
relays assigned the Trip1, Trip2, or Trip3 function operate.
The trip signal may originate from a protective function,
from a digital input assigned the Trip1 function, or from a
communications network command. See Sections 4.2.8
and 6.
Relays assigned to trip or alarm functions operate in failsafe or non-fail-safe mode. Set the mode using the Setup
Relay Outputs Relay x Mode menu.
Except for overload trips, which can be selected to autoreset, trips must be reset with an MPS-OPI, a digital input,
or a network command. A trip cannot be reset when the
trip condition is present.
When a protective function issues an alarm, relays
assigned to the corresponding Alarm1, Alarm2, or Alarm3
function operate. Alarms auto-reset when the alarm
condition is corrected.
Relays assigned the Interlock function energize when all
digital inputs assigned the Interlock function are valid
(voltage detected at digital input).
TABLE 4.2 DIGITAL-INPUT FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION
STATE (1)
Start1
Start2
Local Select Local Select +
Local Start1 (2)
Local Start2 (2)
2-Wire Start1
2-Wire Start2
Stop
RLYA Status
RLYB Status
RLYC Status
RLYD Status
4.2.8 DIGITAL INPUTS 1 TO 7
OPI Menu: Setup | Digital Inputs | Digital Input x |
Input x Function
OPI Menu: Setup | Digital Inputs | Digital Input x |
In x Start Bypass
OPI Menu: Setup | Digital Inputs | Digital Input x |
In x Bypass Delay
OPI Menu: Setup | Digital Inputs | Digital Input x |
In x Trip Delay
Each digital input can be assigned to one of the functions
listed in Table 4.2. More than one digital input can be
assigned the same function.
Start inputs are not active when Protection Only is
selected as the starter type. The STOP function is always
active. In Protection Only mode, STOP initiates a Trip1
signal.
Each digital input assigned the Trip1 function has Start
Bypass, Bypass Delay, and Trip Delay set points. When
Start Bypass is enabled, the Trip1 function is bypassed
during a start for the duration specified by Bypass Delay.
Since start detection is based on motor current, this feature
can be used in the Protection Only mode. After the Bypass
Delay, the Trip1 function is enabled and a trip occurs if the
digital-input voltage is removed for the time specified by
the Trip Delay. If Start Bypass is disabled, Bypass Delay
is not used and the Trip1 function is always enabled. The
bypass feature can be used in pump-control applications to
allow time for a pressure switch to close.
Reset inputs are “one-shot” resets that require a
transition from open to closed. Maintaining a reset switch
closure does not inhibit trips.
Interlock
Trip1
Reset
FLA2 Select (3)
Limit1 Stop
Limit2 Stop
Reduced OC
None
(1)
(2)
(3)
1 = Start1 (Momentary)
1 = Start2 (Momentary)
1 = Per CONTROL SELECT Setting
0 = Local Control
0 = Local Control (2)
1 = Per CONTROL SELECT Setting
1 = Start1 (Momentary)
1 = Start2 (Momentary)
1 = Start1 (Maintained)
0 = Stop
1 = Start2 (Maintained)
0 = Stop
1 = Start Allowed
0 = Stop
1 = Contactor Closed
0 = Contactor Open
1 = Contactor Closed
0 = Contactor Open
1 = Contactor Closed
0 = Contactor Open
1 = Contactor Closed
0 = Contactor Open
1 = Start Allowed (If all interlocks are valid.)
0 = Start Not Allowed
1 = No Trip1
0 = Trip1 (Delays Selectable)
1 = Reset Trips
1 = Select FLA2
0 = Select FLA1
1 = Start1 Allowed
0 = Start1 Stop
1 = Start2 Allowed
0 = Start2 Stop
1 = Reduced OC Set Point Not Operational
0 = Reduced OC Set Point Operational
No Assignment (Default)
1 = Input voltage applied, 0 = Input voltage not
applied.
Interlocks bypassed in LOCAL.
Applies only to Protection Only mode.
LOCAL is selected using the OPI, the digital input, or
by network communications. The Local Select source is
responsible for de-selecting. For example if both the
digital input and the network communications select
LOCAL, both must also de-select LOCAL. The Local
Select – and Local Select + selections allow the digital
input to select LOCAL control. Both positive and negative
logic versions allow implementation of various “Hand-OffAuto” control schemes. See Section 6 for CONTROL
SELECT operation.
In applications where MPS starter functions are not
used, FLA2 Select can be used to switch between FLA1 and
FLA2. This applies only to Protection Only mode. The
selected FLA is displayed in the Metering System State
menu.
Operation and Setup
Page 4-4
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
Limit1 Stop and Limit2 Stop are limit-switch inputs
typically used with reversing starters. Limit1 Stop is a stop
input associated with Start1 and Limit2 Stop is a stop input
associated with Start2.
The Reduced OC selection operates in conjunction with
the reduced overcurrent set point which must be enabled.
See Section 5.5.
When Reduced OC is selected and no digital input
voltage is applied, the reduced overcurrent set point is
operational. When digital input voltage is applied, the
reduced overcurrent set point is not operational.
The following rules apply when multiple inputs are
assigned the same function:
Start1, Start2, Local Start1, and Local Start2:
Momentary voltage on any input will initiate a start.
(MPS must be in LOCAL for Local Start1 and Local
Start2 operation.)
Stop: Voltage must be present on all inputs to allow
an MPS-controlled start.
Interlock: Voltage must be present on all inputs to
allow an MPS-controlled start and to energize an
interlock output relay. Digital inputs programmed as
Interlock are bypassed in LOCAL. Interlocks must
remain valid while the motor is running.
RLYA, RLYB, RLYC, and RLYD Status: Voltage
applied to any input programmed for a contactor status
results in contactor-closed status.
Reset: Voltage applied to any input will reset trips.
2-Wire Start1 and 2-Wire Start2: Voltage on any input
will initiate a start. All inputs must be open for a stop.
FLA2 Select: Voltage on one or more inputs assigned
to FLA2 Select will select FLA2.
4.2.9 TACHOMETER INPUT (HSI)
OPI Menu: Setup | System Ratings | Sync Speed
OPI Menu: Setup | Digital Inputs | Tachometer
PARAMETER
Phase Current
Earth Leakage
Differential Current
Used I2t Capacity
Stator Temperature (1)
Bearing Temperature (1)
Load Temperature (1)
Ambient Temperature (1)
Voltage
Unbalance (I)
Power Factor
Real Power
Reactive Power
Apparent Power
Zero
Full Scale
Speed
(1)
This input is provided for connection to a 24-Vdc
proximity sensor for speed measurement. Set the number
of pulses per revolution and enable the High-Speed Input
in the Tachometer menu. Pulse-frequency range is 10 Hz
to 10 kHz. These two settings are required for RPM
readings.
If Failure to Accelerate protection is used, set the
motor’s synchronous speed in the Sync Speed menu. To
fully utilize a speed-setting range from 10 to 100%, a fullspeed frequency of at least 100 Hz is required.
The MPS averages 16 pulse periods to determine speed.
4.2.10 ANALOG OUTPUT
OPI Menu: Setup | Analog Output | Output Parameter
A 25-mA programmable current output is provided on
the CTU. Analog-output parameters are shown in
Table 4.3.
Factory calibration is 4-20 mA. If calibration is
required, use the Analog Output menus.
Zero Calibration:
Select Zero in the Output Parameter menu.
Measure the output current and adjust the Zero
Calibrate setting for the desired output.
The
calibration number for 4 mA will be in the range of
100 to 110.
Full-Scale Calibration:
Select Full Scale in the Output Parameter menu.
Measure the output current and adjust the
FS Calibrate setting for the desired output. The
calibration number for 20 mA will be in the range of
540 to 550.
Calibration numbers are not changed when factory
defaults are loaded.
TABLE 4.3 ANALOG-OUTPUT PARAMETERS
FULL SCALE
PH-CT-Primary Rating
EFCT-Primary Rating
DF-CT-Primary Rating
100% I2t
200°C (392°F)
200°C (392°F)
200°C (392°F)
200°C (392°F)
System Voltage
1.0 per unit or 100%
1.0
CT Primary System Voltage 3
CT Primary System Voltage 3
CT Primary System Voltage 3
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Synchronous Speed
COMMENTS
Maximum of 3 Phases
Maximum of 3 Currents
Maximum of Stator RTD’s
Maximum of Bearing RTD’s
Maximum of Load RTD’s
Maximum of Ambient RTD’s
Maximum Line-to-Line Voltage
I2/I1
Absolute Value
Absolute Value
Absolute Value
Absolute Value
Used for Zero Calibration
Used for Full-Scale Calibration
Output range is 0 to 200°C (32°F to 392°F). The output defaults to the calibrated zero output for an open
or shorted RTD sensor.
Operation and Setup
Page 4-5
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
4.2.11 ANALOG INPUT
OPI Menu: Setup | 4-20 Analog In | Input Function
The analog input function is selectable as Metering
Only, Protection, Sync to ASD, or Motor Speed.
4.2.11.1 METERING ONLY
OPI Menu: Setup | 4-20 Analog In Metering Only
When Metering Only is selected, an analog input does
not affect MPS operation, but its value can be observed in
the Metering menu and with a communications network.
4.2.11.2 PROTECTION
OPI Menu: Setup | 4-20 Analog In Protection
The Protection analog input has high- and low-level trip
and alarm set points. A high-level trip or alarm occurs
when the 4-20-mA input exceeds the high-level trip or
alarm set point. A low-level trip or alarm occurs when the
4-20-mA input is lower than the low-level trip or alarm set
point.
4.2.11.3 SYNCHRONIZE TO ASD
OPI Menu: Setup | 4-20 Analog In Sync to ASD
When Sync to ASD is selected the MPS uses the 4-20
mA input to set the internal sampling rate for current and
voltage inputs.
Select drive-frequency values
corresponding to 4 and 20 mA.
4.2.11.4 MOTOR SPEED
OPI Menu: Setup | 4-20 Analog In Motor Speed
This selection overrides the selections for the high-speed
tachometer input – failure-to-accelerate protection and
speed metering use the analog input as the source of speed
information.
4.2.12 STARTER
OPI Menu: Setup | Starter
As a default, Starter Type is set to Protection Only.
When a starter type is selected, output relays must be
assigned for contactor control. See Section 4.2.7. Digital
inputs must be assigned if contactor-status feedback is
required. See Section 4.2.8.
See Section 6 for starter information.
4.2.13 PROTECTION
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection
OPI Menu: Setup | System Ratings | Run Mode Delay
See Section 5 for protective function details. As a
minimum, locked-rotor current and time must be set for
overload protection.
Some protective functions are active after the Run-Mode
Delay.
4.2.14 MISCELLANEOUS CONFIGURATION
OPI Menu: Setup | System Config
System Name
Appears on many of the display
screens and can be set by the user.
(18-character alphanumeric field)
Password
Clock Setting
Password Timeout
Maintenance
Used to change the 4-character
alphanumeric password.
Used to set the date, 24-hour clock,
and IRIG set points. Daylight
savings time is not supported.
Used to set the password time-out
delay. Delay is measured from last
key press.
Used to:
Clear event records, trip
counters, energy values, and run
hours
Load defaults
View firmware version and
serial numbers
Unlock local control if
communication is lost
Update Firmware
4.2.15 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS
OPI Menu: Setup Hardware Network Comms
The standard interface on the MPS is an RS-485
network. Modbus® RTU and A-B® DF1 protocols are
supported.
The protocol, network ID (address), error checking, and
baud rate are selectable. See Appendices C, D, E, and F.
If equipped with an optional network interface, refer to
the appropriate optional communications-interface
manual.
4.3 MPS-OPI
4.3.1 GENERAL
See Fig. 4.3. The Operator Interface (OPI) is used to
perform motor-control functions, display meter readings,
and program the MPS-CTU. Set points are not resident in
the OPI. Control voltage for the MPS-OPI (24 Vdc) is
supplied by the CTU and communications with the CTU is
through an RS-485 link. This allows the MPS-OPI to be
mounted up to 1.2 km (4,000’) from the CTU. Up to three
OPI’s can be used with each CTU.
4.3.2 CONFIGURING THE MPS-CTU FOR OPI
OPERATION
OPI Menu: Setup | Hardware | OPI Display
Select the number of OPI's in the Number of OPI's menu.
The MPS-CTU supports up to three OPI’s. In multipleOPI systems, all OPI's display the same information and
the CTU will process key presses from all OPI's. If an OPI
is not used, set number of OPI's to 1 (default).
A loss-of-communication trip can be enabled in the OPILoss Trip menu. Display intensity can be set in the
Intensity menu.
To extend the life of the vacuum-florescent display, a
screen saver is provided and enabled using the Screen
Saver menu. The screen saver activation time is defined
by the Setup | System Config | Password Timeout setting.
Operation and Setup
Page 4-6
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
4.3.3 STARTER CONTROL
OPI Menu: Setup | Starter | Starter Type
OPI Menu: Setup | Hardware | OPI Display |
OPI Ctrl Select
A starter type other than Protection Only must be
selected for starter functions to become operational.
The OPI has a CONTROL SELECT key and three
yellow LED’s (labeled REMOTE, OPI, and LOCAL) to
select and indicate the start sources that the MPS will
respond to. Each of the start sources can be enabled or
disabled in the OPI Ctrl Select menu, and the CONTROL
SELECT key allows the operator to choose from among
the enabled start sources. The factory default has all
sources enabled and REMOTE selected. Regardless of the
control setting, all stop sources are always enabled.
Local Start 2 are the only start sources the MPS will
respond to.
NOTE: The I2t Start Inhibit function and digital inputs
programmed as Interlock are bypassed in local control.
Local control can also be selected with a network
command or by a digital input programmed for Local
Select—both have priority over the CONTROL SELECT
key. If either or both methods force the MPS into local
control and then release local control, the MPS will return
to the previous control setting. Each local-control source
must release local control to allow the MPS to return to the
previous control setting.
4.3.3.1 OPI CONTROL
If only the OPI LED is on, the MPS is under OPI control
and start keys on the OPI are the only start source the MPS
will respond to. If the OPI has been enabled as a start
source for remote control, the OPI LED will also be on
when remote control is selected. In this case, the MPS will
also respond to the other sources enabled in remote control
(Remote Group).
4.3.3.3 REMOTE CONTROL
OPI Menu: Setup | Starter | Remote Group
When the REMOTE LED is on, MPS start control is
from the start sources enabled in the Remote Group menu.
Start source selections are Digital Inputs, OPI, and
Network. If Digital Inputs is enabled, digital inputs
programmed for Start1, Start2, 2-Wire Start1, and 2-Wire
Start2 are enabled. If OPI is enabled, the start keys on the
OPI are enabled and if Network is enabled, start commands
from the network are enabled.
4.3.3.2 LOCAL CONTROL
OPI Menu: Setup | Digital Inputs | Digital Input x |
Input x Function
When the LOCAL LED is on, the MPS is under local
control and digital inputs programmed as Local Start 1 or
NOTE: The OPI STOP key and digital STOP inputs always
cause a stop.
LITTELFUSE STARTCO
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
CONTROL
SELECT
MPS-OPI
TRIP
ALARM
START
2
REMOTE
OPI
LOCAL
START
1
STOP
MAIN
MAINMENU
MENU
Metering
Ñ
Metering —
²Messages
Messages Ñ—
Setup —
Ñ
Setup
RUN
STOP
RESET
ESC
ENTER
FIGURE 4.3 MPS-OPI Interface.
Operation and Setup
MPS Motor Protection System
4.3.4 METERING
OPI Menu: Metering
OPI Menu: Setup | Hardware | OPI Display | Meter
Summary
When Metering is selected in the main menu, press the
right-arrow key to access a list of metering displays. Use
the up- and down-arrow keys to scroll through the display
list. Pressing the right-arrow key displays the selected
metering information. See the MPS-OPI menu map in
Appendix A.
RESET is a “hot key” that is active in all meter displays.
Pressing RESET causes a jump to the Trip and Alarm
display to allow trips to be viewed and reset. Press
RESET again to reset a trip. Pressing ESC or the leftarrow key causes a return to the Metering display.
Many displays include per unit (pu) values where
1.0 pu is equal to 100%. Ia, Ib, Ic, I1, and I2 are in per unit
of full-load current. Ig is in per unit of earth-fault-CTprimary rating. Vab, Vbc, and Vca are in per unit of System
Voltage.
The unbalance display indicates minus (-) if current
inputs are not sequenced A-B-C.
The IEEE convention is used for power displays:
+Watts, +Vars, -PF (Lag) Importing Watts,
Importing Vars
+Watts, -Vars, +PF (Lead) Importing Watts,
Exporting Vars
-Watts, -Vars, -PF (Lag)
Exporting Watts,
Exporting Vars
-Watts, +Vars, +PF (Lead) Exporting Watts,
Importing Vars
The operating range for energy values is ±2E±1024,
however the maximum OPI display range is ±2E±34.
The Setup | Hardware | OPI Display | Meter Summary
menu is used to configure the type of metering display
selected by the Metering | Summary menu. In order to
view the maximum amount of data, no menu title is
displayed.
Display selections for the Summary menu are:
IDR
Current-based metering (I), digital
inputs (D), and relay outputs (R):
Average current, current unbalance, earth leakage, used
I2t, digital input and relay output status.
I: xxxx A Iu: x.xx
Ig:xxxx A I2t:xx%
Di: 1..7: xxxxxxx
Ry: 1..5: xxxxx
This selection is the default for the summary display.
Page 4-7
Rev. 6-E-030116
IVP Current-based metering (I), voltage (V),
unbalance, and power (P):
Average current, current unbalance, earth leakage, used
I2t, average voltage, voltage unbalance, power and power
factor.
I: xxxx A
Iu: x.xx
Ig:xxxx A
I2t: xx%
V: xx.xx kV Vu: x.xx
P: xx.x kW PF: x.xx
This selection is applicable for an MPS using voltage
inputs.
IVPA
Current-based metering (I), voltage
(V), power (P), and analog I/O (A):
Average current, average voltage, earth leakage, used
I2t, power, power factor, and analog currents.
I: xxxx A
V: xx.xx kV
Ig:xxxx A
I2t:xx%
P: xx.x kW PF: x.xx
Ai:xxx%
Ao: xxx%
This selection is applicable when the MPS analog
output is used in a process control loop. The analog input
and output values provide indication of control-system
operation.
For each metering display, Table 4.4 shows the
information that can be displayed.
4.3.5 MESSAGES
OPI Menu: Messages
Selecting this menu item allows trip and alarm
messages, status messages, event records, and statistical
data to be viewed and resets to be performed.
4.3.5.1 TRIP RESET
OPI Menu: Messages | Trip and Alarm
Up to fifteen trip and alarm messages can be displayed
in a scrollable-list format. Trip messages must be
individually selected and reset when the OPI RESET key
is used. All trips are simultaneously reset by digital-input
reset, with the MPS-CTU RESET key or with a
communications-network command. Alarms are nonlatching and are displayed only for the time that the alarm
condition exists.
RESET is a “hot key“ to the Trip and Alarm display,
except during set-point entry. In the Trip and Alarm
display, press ESC or the left-arrow key to return to the
display shown when RESET was pressed.
4.3.5.2 STATUS
OPI Menu: Messages | Status Messages
This menu is used to display status messages. Status
messages are shown in Table 4.5.
Operation and Setup
MPS Motor Protection System
METERING MENU
Summary
Current
Unbalance (I)
Earth Leakage
Thermal Capacity
Voltage
Unbalance (V)
Unbalance (I)
Differential (A)
Power
Energy
Frequency
RTD Temperatures
I/O Status
System State
Comm State
(1)
Page 4-8
Rev. 6-E-030116
TABLE 4.4 METERING DISPLAY
INFORMATION DISPLAY (1)
Displays values as per the Meter Summary menu.
IDR, IVP, or IVPA.
Ia, Ib, Ic in A and per unit of Ip.
I1, I2, in per unit of Ip, I2/I1 in per unit.
Ig in A and per unit of Ie.
Used I2t in percent.
Trend I2t in percent.
Displays reset time when tripped on I2t.
Displays time to trip if in overload.
Displays time to I2t Inhibit removal.
Displays time to Starts-Per-Hour Inhibit removal.
Displays number of available starts.
Vab, Vbc, Vca in kV and per unit of Vp.
V1, V2, in per unit of Vp, V2/V1 in per unit.
I1, I2, in per unit of FLA, I2/I1 in per unit.
DIFa, DIFb, DIFc in A and per unit of Id.
P in kW, Q in kVA, S in kVAR, PF.
kWh, kVAh, kVARh.
Vab voltage in per unit of Vp and frequency in Hz.
Summary shows maximum and minimum temperatures for stator, bearing, and load RTD’s in degrees C.
Module and input numbers, name, function, temperature in degrees C for each enabled RTD.
Analog input in mA, digital inputs and relay outputs in binary.
Date and Time, Motor Mode (Stopped, Start, Run)
Displays starter state when starter is enabled.
Displays active FLA when in protection-only mode.
Displays RPM if tachometer input is enabled.
Displays Reduced Overcurrent mode (ROC: ON, ROC: OFF)
Displays ETR mode.
Displays DF1 state as online or timed out.
Displays Modbus state as online or timed out.
Displays Anybus module error and status.
Displays DeviceNet errors and status.
All but Summary, RTD, and System State metering displays show System Name.
TABLE 4.5 STATUS MESSAGES
MESSAGES
DESCRIPTION
INx Interlock Open
INx Stop Open
INx Limit1 Open
INx Limit2 Open
I2t Start Inhibit
Sph Start Inhibit
The interlock assigned to digital input x is open, preventing a start.
The stop switch assigned to digital input x is open, preventing a start.
The Limit1 switch assigned to digital input x is open, preventing a Start1.
The Limit2 switch assigned to digital input x is open, preventing a Start2.
The Used I2t has exceeded the I2t Inhibit level. A start is prevented if I2t Start Inhibit is enabled.
The number of starts per hour has been exceeded. A start is prevented if a starts-per hour trip or alarm is
enabled.
Indicates that the MPS is in ETR mode. Does not prevent a start.
When a stop is issued and the backspin timer is enabled, a start is prevented until the backspin timer
times out. This message is displayed when the backspin timer is on.
t Disabled by ETR
Backspin Timer On
Operation and Setup
Page 4-9
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
4.3.5.3 DATA LOGGING
OPI Menu: Messages | Event Records
Trip-record data, start-record data, and Emergency
Thermal Resets (ETR) are logged. Trip-record data
includes the time of trip, cause of trip, and pre-trip (1) data.
ETR records contain a snapshot of the data prior to an
ETR.
Trip or ETR records include:
Time Stamp YY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Vab, Vbc, Vca, Ia, Ib, Ic, and 3I0 at time of trip or ETR
Unbalance (I2/I1, V2/V1) at time of trip or ETR
P, Q, S, and PF at time of trip or ETR (1)
Used I2t at time of trip or ETR
PTC/RTD temperature data if applicable
Differential module data if applicable
Start records(2) are triggered by motor current and include:
Time Stamp YY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Maximum values of Ia, Ib, Ic, and 3I0 during the start
Maximum value of I2/I1(4), V2/V1 during the start
Minimum values of Vab, Vbc, Vca during the start
Maximum differential currents during the start if
applicable
I2t used during the start(3)
Start duration
PTC/RTD temperature data if applicable
Record Type .............................. Trip/Start/ETR
Number of Records ................... 64 (First In First Out)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Recorded values for power quantities (P, Q, S, PF)
are averages of measurements over the previous 16
cycles.
Values updated at 0.5-s intervals during a start.
Record logged when the Run mode is entered.
Starting I2t can be used to determine the I2t Lockout
Level. See Section 5.2.
Measurements enabled 0.5 s after start current is
detected.
4.3.5.4 STATISTICAL DATA
OPI Menu: Messages | Statistics
OPI Menu: Setup | System Config | Maintenance
The MPS records the following statistical data:
Running hours.
Counters for all trips.
Statistical data can be cleared in the Maintenance menu.
4.3.6 PASSWORD ENTRY AND PROGRAMMING
OPI Menu: Setup | System Config | Password Timeout
NOTE: Factory default password is 1111.
All set points are locked from changes until the fourcharacter password is entered. If set-point access is
locked, the user is prompted to enter the password. Once
entered, set-point access is allowed and remains enabled
until a key has not been pressed for the time defined by
the Password Timeout set point.
EXAMPLE:
Prior to password entry:
When ENTER is pressed, the Password Entry display
is shown:
Use the left- and right-arrow keys to select the position
of the flashing cursor. Use the up- and down-arrow keys
to select password characters. Press ENTER.
When the correct password is entered, a flashing cursor
is displayed, the set-point range and units are shown, and
set points can be changed.
Use the up- and down-arrow keys to change a set-point
update-field character, and use the left- and right-arrow
keys to move between characters. Press ENTER to update
the set point, or press ESC to exit the display without
changing the set point. A set point is set to the minimum
or maximum value of its range if an out-of-range value is
entered. Press ESC to exit the set-point-update screen.
4.3.5.5 EMERGENCY THERMAL RESET
OPI Menu: Messages | Emerg I2t Reset
The Emerg I2t Reset menu is used to reset the thermal
memory. See Section 5.2.3.
Operation and Setup
MPS Motor Protection System
The sequence for set-point characters depends upon the
set-point type. The character sequence for numeric set
points is:
...0123456789.0123.....
The character sequence for string set points is:
. . . [0…9] [A…Z] [a…z] SP - . / [0…9] [A…Z] . . . . .
Characters forming a series are shown in brackets and
“SP” represents the space character.
For set points requiring selection from a list, the up and
down arrow keys are used to scroll through the items. In
the same manner as menu items, selections are displayed
using one of the three cursor symbols (½«²) preceding
the item. Pressing ENTER selects the item and that item
is indicated by the “” symbol to its right.
EXAMPLE:
4.4 MPS-RTD
OPI Menu: Setup | Hardware | RTD Modules
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | RTD Temperature
The MPS-RTD module extends MPS protective
functions to include multiple-RTD temperature
monitoring. It has eight inputs that can be individually
configured for RTD type, trip and alarm settings, name,
and function. The RTD types are 10- copper, 100-
nickel, 120- nickel, and 100- platinum. Functions are
stator, bearing, load, and ambient.
Control voltage for the MPS-RTD (24 Vdc) is supplied
by the MPS-CTU and communication is through an RS485 link. This allows the MPS-RTD to be mounted up to
1.2 km (4,000’) from the MPS-CTU.
To enable RTD protection, the total number of modules
must be selected in the Total Modules menu and
Temperature Trip Action or Alarm Action must be
enabled. If RTD protection is disabled, metering
information is still provided. Up to three modules can be
used. In the RTD Modules menu, the action to be taken
by the MPS-CTU in response to loss of communication is
selected.
When the hardware has been configured, temperature
set points and sensor-failure action selections in the RTD
Temperature menu are used for RTD temperature
protection. See Section 5.27.
Page 4-10
Rev. 6-E-030116
4.5 MPS-DIF
OPI Menu: Setup | Hardware | DIF Module
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Differential
The MPS-DIF Differential Module extends MPS
protective functions to include phase-differential
monitoring. It has three differential-CT inputs that can be
used in a three-CT core-balance connection, a sixdifferential-CT connection, or a six-CT connection that
includes phase-CT MPS inputs. The core-balance, threeCT connection is recommended.
Control voltage for the MPS-DIF (24 Vdc) is supplied
by the MPS-CTU and communication is through an
RS-485 link. This allows the MPS-DIF to be mounted up
to 1.2 km (4,000’) from the MPS-CTU, and the link can
be shared by other MPS I/O modules.
Enable the module and loss-of-communications
protection in the Hardware Dif Module menu, and
choose protection settings in the Protection Differential
menu. See Section 5.25.
4.6 WAVEFORM CAPTURE
The MPS continuously samples seven channels of data
consisting of the three-phase currents, three-phase
voltages, and the earth leakage current. The sample rate
is fixed at 16 samples/cycle and sample data (Trace Data)
for each channel are stored in a 4800 sample memory.
This provides a record depth of 300 cycles, or 5 seconds
of pre-trip data at 60 Hz.
When a trip occurs, Trace Data capture is halted and a
date and time stamp is added. Trace Data values are
retrieved using SE-Comm-RIS which generates an
industry-standard COMTRADE and CSV file. See
Appendix E for data mapping definitions and conversion
formulas.
The Setup | System Config | Trace Auto-Start menu is
used to set the Trace Data start mode after a trip has
occurred.
When enabled, Trace Data capture
automatically starts when reset is pressed. When disabled,
Trace Data capture requires a manual re-start using the
Messages | Re-Start Trace. This allows the MPS to be
reset and the trip data to be analyzed at a later time. Trace
Data start can also be activated using Command 13 via the
communications interface.
Trace Data are stored in volatile memory and are lost if
the MPS loses supply voltage. Regardless of the Trace
Auto-Start setting, waveform capture starts automatically
on power-up if there are no previous trips.
Operation and Setup
Page 5-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
5. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.1 GENERAL
The MPS measures true RMS, peak, and fundamentalfrequency values of current and voltage. Fundamentalfrequency values (magnitude and phase angle) are obtained
using Discrete-Fourier Transform (DFT) filtering that
rejects dc and harmonics. The type of measurement used
for a protective function is indicated in each section.
Unless otherwise indicated, protective functions have a
programmable definite-time characteristic.
Each
protective function can be assigned a trip action that
defines the output contact(s) used. Except for overload
protection, which has auto-reset available, MPS trips are
latched. Trips are logged.
(1)
(2)
Trip-action selections are:
Disable
Trip1 (1)
Trip2 (2)
Trip3 (2)
Trip1 and Trip2
Trip1 and Trip3
Trip1 and Trip2 and Trip3
Trip2 and Trip3
Initiates a starter stop. See Section 6.
Does not initiate a starter stop. See Section 6.
Most protection functions can be assigned an alarm
action. Alarms auto-reset and are not logged.
Alarm-action selections are:
Disable
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm1 and Alarm2
Alarm1 and Alarm3
Alarm1 and Alarm2 and Alarm3
Alarm2 and Alarm3
To operate output contacts, trip and alarm actions must
be assigned to output relays using the Setup Relay Outputs
menu. See Section 4.2.7.
NOTE: When starter functions are used, only set points
with a Trip Action that includes Trip1 will cause the starter
to stop when a trip occurs.
When enabled, Jam, Power-Factor, Undercurrent, and
Underpower protection are not active during a start and are
active in the Run mode. The Run mode is initiated when
motor current is between 1.5 x (CT-Primary Rating/FLA)
and 125% FLA for the duration of the setting in the Setup
System Ratings Run Mode Delay menu.
Run Mode Delay is adjustable from five to 120 seconds.
Run-mode status is displayed in the Metering | System State
menu. One of three states are indicated: Motor:Start,
Motor:Run, or Motor:Off. The motor status line also
indicates one of two states for the Reduced Overcurrent
(ROC) feature: ROC:OFF or ROC:ON. See Section 5.5.
NOTE: See Appendix B for default set-point values.
Per-unit notation (pu) is used. 1 pu = 100%.
5.2 OVERLOAD
At a minimum, for customized thermal-overload
protection, motor data, must be entered for Full-Load
Current, Service Factor, Locked-Rotor Current, Cold
Locked-Rotor Time, and Hot Locked-Rotor Time.
5.2.1 THERMAL MODEL
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Overload
OPI Menu: Setup | System Ratings
A NEMA- or K-factor-based thermal-model algorithm
can be selected.
The NEMA-based algorithm uses the square of the
maximum RMS phase current as the thermal-model input:
I 2 I max rms
2
I in per unit of FLA
The K-factor-based algorithm uses a thermal-model
input based on true positive- and negative-sequence
component values:
I2 = I12 + kI22
I in per unit of FLA
Where:
I1 = positive sequence current
I2 = negative sequence current
k = factor relating the heat produced by I2 relative to I1
A conservative value for k is:
k
230
IL
2
Where :
locked rotor current
IL
full load current
The thermal time constant () used by the thermal model
to provide starting and running I2t protection is:
TC
sf 2
ln1 2
IL
Where :
TC cold locked rotor time in seconds
sf service factor in per unit
When the motor is stopped, the thermal model uses a
time constant that is user selectable as a multiple (Cooling
Factor) of the thermal time constant ().
Protective Functions
MPS Motor Protection System
The cold-curve time-to-trip (t) for current above
FLA sf is:
sf 2
t ln1 2
I
The MPS provides indication of thermal trend and used
thermal capacity. Thermal trend is the value that used
thermal capacity is tending toward and it is a function of
the square of motor current. For currents greater than or
equal to FLA sf, time-to-trip is displayed in Metering |
Thermal Capacity. The thermal trend value (Trend I2t) is:
I2
Trend I 2t 2 100%
sf
For currents less than FLA sf, the thermal trend value
is:
I 2 T TH
Trend I 2t 2 C
sf TC
Where :
100%
TH hot locked rotor time in seconds
The curve shown in Fig. 5.1 is a Class-20 thermalprotection curve (20-s trip @ 600% FLA) with a service
factor of 1.15. FLA multiplied by service factor is the
current at which used thermal capacity begins to trend
towards a trip. Time-to-trip approaches infinity when
I = FLA sf. Service factor has little influence on time-totrip when motor current is greater than 300% FLA.
MPS thermal-overload protection is dynamic. Time to
trip at any overload current depends on the value of Used
I2t as Used I2t increases, time to trip decreases. This is
illustrated in Fig. 5.1 by the protection curves labelled 25%
Used I2t, 50% Used I2t, and 75% Used I2t. Programming
software SE-Comm-RIS has a plot function to display and
export MPS protection curves.
An overload alarm occurs when Used I2t reaches the I2t
Alarm Level set point.
An overload trip occurs when Used I2t reaches 100%.
When an overload trip occurs, reset is not allowed until
Used I2t falls below the I2t Inhibit Level set point. The
time-to-reset in minutes is:
t = - Cooling Factor ln(I2t Inhibit Level) / 60
Time-to-reset is displayed in the Metering Thermal
Capacity menu. The thermal model has three reset modes;
Normal, Auto, and Multiple Motor Seq. The thermaloverload reset mode is set using the Setup Protection
Overload I2t Reset Type menu.
In the Normal mode, a thermal-overload trip reset is not
allowed until Used I2t falls below the I2t Inhibit Level
Page 5-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
setting. A reset input is required to reset the trip. Normal
is the default reset mode.
In the Auto mode, a thermal-overload trip is
automatically reset when Used I2t falls below the I2t Inhibit
Level setting.
NOTE: If the starter circuit is configured for 2-wire control,
the motor can start without warning when Auto mode is
selected. A warning label may be required.
In the Multiple Motor Seq. mode, Used I2t decreases
exponentially with a fixed two-second time constant when
there is no motor current. This mode is used in applications
where one overload relay is used to protect several motors
operating in sequence with only one motor running at any
one time. A two-second stop is required between starts so
that Used I2t decreases sufficiently to allow the next motor
to start. It is assumed that each motor is allowed to cool
between starts. Motor life may be decreased if this feature
is used in single-motor applications. When an overload trip
occurs, the trip is latched but can be reset two seconds after
the trip.
When I2t Start Inhibit is enabled, the I2t Inhibit Level set
point can be used to prevent a start with insufficient I2t
available. When Used I2t is above the I2t Inhibit Level set
point and motor current is not detected, Alarm1 is issued,
starter functions Start1 and Start2 are disabled, and the
relay assigned to Start Inhibit is energized. The time until
a start is permitted is displayed in Metering | Thermal
Capacity, and I2t Inhibit Alarm is displayed in the Trip and
Alarm message window. When Used I2t falls below the I2t
Inhibit Level set point, the relay assigned to Start Inhibit is
de-energized, the inhibit alarm is cancelled, and starter
functions Start1 and Start2 are enabled. Trips require a
manual reset. I2t Start Inhibit is removed when current is
detected. This applies in both Starter and Protection-only
modes. The Start-Inhibit relay is shared with the Starts-PerHour function. See Section 5.23.
If the motor is equipped with RTD sensors, the thermal
model can compensate for high ambient temperature and
loss of ventilation. See Section 5.27.
I2t used during each start is recorded in Messages
Event Records. This information can be used to determine
the I2t Inhibit Level set point to ensure sufficient I2t is
available to complete a start, and to minimize thermaloverload-reset time.
FLA Rating .......................... 1.00 to 5,000.00 A
Service Factor ...................... 1.00 to 1.25
Locked-Rotor Current .......... 1.50 to 10.00 x FLA
Hot Locked-Rotor Time ....... 0.10 to 100.00 s
Cold Locked-Rotor Time ..... 0.10 to 100.00 s
Cooling Factor ..................... 0.10 to 10.00
Model Type: ......................... NEMA, K-Factor
I2t Reset Type ....................... Normal, Auto,
Multiple Motor Sequence
K-Factor ............................... 1.00 to 10.00
Protective Functions
Page 5-3
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
I2t Alarm ............................... 0.50 to 1.00 pu
I2t Inhibit Level .................... 0.10 to 0.90 pu
I2t Start Inhibit ...................... Enable/Disable
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
Measurement Method .......... DFT or RMS
10000
8000
6000
5000
4000
3000
SERVICE FACTOR 1.00 TO 1.25
SHOWN AT 1.15
2000
1000
800
TIME-TO-TRIP (SECONDS)
600
500
400
300
200
TIME-TO-TRIP DECREASES
AS USED I2t INCREASES
100
80
60
50
40
30
0% USED I2t (cold)
20
25% USED I2t
50% USED I2t
10
8
6
5
4
75% USED I2t
3
2
1
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
MOTOR CURRENT (%FLA)
FIGURE 5.1 Class-20 Overload Curve.
Protective Functions
Page 5-4
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
5.2.2 LOCKED-ROTOR TIMES
In all cases, values for TH and TC should be obtained
from the motor manufacturer. The following information
is provided to assist in selecting values for TH and TC only
if manufacturer data is not available.
Heater-style overload elements are available as
Class 10, Class 20, or Class 30. Class 20 is recommended
for general applications, Class 10 is used for motors with
short locked-rotor time capability, and Class 30 is used in
high-inertia applications to allow additional accelerating
time where motors are within Class-30 performance
requirements. These overloads can be replicated by setting
TC = 10, 20, or 30 s; TH = 0.1 s; and Locked-Rotor Current
= 6.00 x FLA.
An induction motor built to the NEMA MG 1 standard
is capable of:
two starts in succession (coasting to rest between starts)
with the motor initially at ambient temperature (cold
start)
one start with the motor initially at a temperature not
exceeding its rated-load operating temperature (hot
start).
Since the connected load has a direct influence on motor
heating during a start, NEMA MG 1 defines the load torque
and the load inertia (Wk2) for these starts as a function of
the motor’s rated power and synchronous speed. To satisfy
the cold-start requirement, a start must not use more than
50% thermal capacity. To satisfy the hot-start requirement,
used thermal capacity at steady state must be less than 50%.
If the thermal model in the MPS has the correct value of
TC and if Used I2t increases by 50% during a start, the load
is equal to the NEMA-defined load and two starts from
cold will be permitted. If Used I2t increases by more than
50% during a start, the load is greater than the NEMAdefined load and two starts from cold should not be
permitted — a delay is required between starts. The
appropriate delay can be obtained by enabling I2t Start
Inhibit and setting the I2t Inhibit Level equal to 100% minus
the I2t used during a start (a slightly lower level is
recommended to allow for supply and load variations). If
Used I2t increases by less than 50% during a start, the load
is less than the NEMA-defined load and two starts from
cold will be permitted.
The magnitude of TH relative to TC determines if a hot
start will be permitted if I2t Start Inhibit is enabled and the
I2t Inhibit Level is set as described above. If Used I2t
increases by 50% or less during a start, a hot start will be
permitted if TH is equal to or greater than 50% of TC.
Increasing TH above 50% of TC is not recommended unless
specific information is available with respect to TH.
5.2.3 EMERGENCY THERMAL RESET
OPI Menu: Messages | Emerg I2t Reset Reset I2t Memory
Emergency Thermal Reset (ETR) sets Used I2t to 0%,
resets starts-per-hour variables, and disables PTC and RTD
temperature trips. Program access (password) is required.
Disabled-temperature protection is indicated by
t Disabled by ETR in the Status Messages display. If PTC
or RTD temperature protection is not enabled, t Disabled
by ETR will not be displayed. Stator RTD or PTC trips are
reset when ETR is performed regardless of measured
temperatures. Temperature protection must be re-enabled
in the Messages Emerg I2t Reset Reenable Temp menu,
or by cycling supply voltage.
Temperature alarms and sensor verification remain
enabled during ETR.
NOTE: Temperature protection is not automatically reenabled after an Emergency Thermal Reset.
5.3 OVERCURRENT
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Overcurrent
Overcurrent protection is based on the largest
fundamental-frequency component (DFT) of the three
phase currents. An alarm-level setting is not provided.
When enabled, overcurrent protection is active at all
times. It is not bypassed during a start.
Trip Level............................. 1.00 to 15.00 x CT-Primary
Rating (Ip)
Trip Delay (TD) ................... 0.00 to 10.00 s
(See Tables 5.1 and 5.2)
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Measurement Method .......... DFT
(1)
TABLE 5.1 TRIP TIME
STARTER
FAULT LEVEL
TRIP RELAYS
(ms)
RELAYS (ms)
(multiples of trip(± 10 ms)
level setting) (1)
(± 15 ms)
2
TD + 35
TD + 45
5
TD + 30
TD + 40
10
TD + 27
TD + 37
18
TD + 26
TD + 36
For overcurrent faults less than 18 x Ip.
For earth faults less than 1 x Ie.
TABLE 5.2 FAULT DURATION REQUIRED FOR TRIP
FAULT DURATION
FAULT LEVEL
(1)
(multiples of triplevel setting) (1)
TD 20 ms
(ms)
TD > 20 ms
2
5
10
18
10
5
2
1
TD – 10
TD – 15
TD – 18
TD – 19
For overcurrent faults less than 18 x Ip.
For earth faults less than 1 x Ie.
Protective Functions
MPS Motor Protection System
The asymmetrical-current multipliers for RMS and DFT
measuring methods are shown in Fig. 5.2. X/R is the ratio
of system reactance to system resistance. Typical X/R
values are 6.6 for a low-voltage system, 15 for a mediumvoltage system, and can be as high as 25 for a high-voltage
system. As shown by the graph, the DFT filters the dc
component so that the overcurrent setting can be set closer
to the symmetrical fault value.
ASYMMETRICAL MULTIPLYING FACTOR
1.8
1.7
RMS
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
1.2
DFT
1.1
Page 5-5
Rev. 6-E-030116
Trip Level............................. 1.00 to 15.00 x CT-Primary
Rating (Ip)
Trip Delay ............................ Fixed at 0.00 (Instantaneous)
See Tables 5.1 and 5.2
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Measurement Method .......... DFT
5.6 JAM
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Jam
A trip or alarm occurs if a jam condition is detected. Jam
protection is active when the motor is in the Run mode,
allowing protection to be set below motor-starting current.
Trip Level............................. 1.00 to 10.00 x FLA
Trip Delay ............................ 1.00 to 100.00 s
Alarm Level ......................... 1.00 to 10.00 x FLA
Alarm Delay ......................... 1.00 to 100.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
Measurement Method .......... DFT
1.0
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
X/R
FIGURE 5.2 Asymmetrical-Current Multipliers.
5.4 AUXILIARY OVERCURRENT
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Aux Overcurrent
Auxiliary overcurrent is the same as overcurrent
protection. This function is intended to be used when
backup protection for the overcurrent function is required.
Trip Level ............................. 1.00 to 15.00 x CT-Primary
Rating (Ip)
Trip Delay ............................ 0.00 to 10.00 s
(See Tables 5.1 and 5.2)
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Measurement Method ........... DFT
5.5 REDUCED OVERCURRENT
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Reduced OC
Reduced overcurrent is used to reduce the overcurrent
set point when performing maintenance while a motor is
running. This mode of operation can be used to meet NEC
240.87 Arc Energy Reduction (B) (3) Energy-reducing
maintenance switching with local status indicator.
Reduced overcurrent is controlled by a digital input
assigned to Reduced OC. When the digital input is not
applied, this set point is operational and when the digital
input is applied, this set point is not operational. When
reduced overcurrent is selected, ROC:ON is displayed in
the Metering System State menu and a relay assigned to
Reduced OC will be energized.
The Protection selection must include Trip1, Trip2, or
Trip3. If Disable is selected, Reduced OC mode is
disabled.
5.7 EARTH FAULT
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Earth Fault
Earth-fault protection is based on the fundamentalfrequency component of zero-sequence current.
Trip Level............................. 0.05 to 1.00 x EF-CTPrimary Rating (Ie)
Trip Delay ............................ 0.00 to 100.00 s
(See Tables 5.1 and 5.2)
Alarm Level ......................... 0.05 to 1.00 x Ie
Alarm Delay ......................... 0.00 to 100.00 s
Protection ............................ Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
Measurement Method .......... DFT
5.8 CURRENT UNBALANCE
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Unbalance (I)
OPI Menu: Setup | System Config | Ip Threshold
Positive-sequence current (I1) and negative-sequence
current (I2) are used to determine current unbalance (I2/I1).
The unbalance display range is 0.00 to 1.00 where 1.00 is
100% unbalance—a single-phase condition. Negative
unbalance will be indicated if current inputs are connected
B-A-C. Severe unbalance may be indicated if phase-CT
polarity is incorrect.
Lightly loaded systems, especially with synchronous
motors, may cause false current unbalance trips. The IP
Threshold sets the current level where unbalance
protection becomes active. The IP Threshold is based on
the maximum of the three-phase currents.
For example, if the CT-primary rating (Ip) is 100 A, and
Ip Threshold is set to 0.25, current unbalance protection
will be active above 25 A.
Protective Functions
Page 5-6
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
Trip Level ............................. 0.05 to 1.00
Trip Delay ............................ 1.00 to 100.00 s
Alarm Level ......................... 0.05 to 1.00
Alarm Delay ......................... 1.00 to 100.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
IP Threshold .......................... 0.10 to 0.50 x CT-primary
rating (IP)
Measurement Method ........... DFT
5.9 PHASE LOSS—CURRENT
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Phase Loss (I)
Phase loss is a severe form of unbalance. When phase
loss occurs, negative-sequence current (I2) is equal to
positive-sequence current (I1) and current unbalance is
100% or 1.00 pu. The phase-loss algorithm considers I2/I1
from 0.90 to 1.00 to be a phase loss. This occurs when one
phase is open resulting in two current vectors at 180°. Set
the phase-loss-trip delay lower than the unbalance trip
delay to avoid an unbalance trip in the event of a phase loss.
NOTE: An open CT will result in I2/I1=0.5 because the
phase angle between the other two phases remain at 120°.
This is not considered a phase loss.
Trip Delay ............................ 1.00 to 100.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Measurement Method ........... DFT
5.10 PHASE REVERSE—CURRENT
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Phase Rev (I)
If the current phase sequence is B-A-C, the magnitude
of negative-sequence current will be larger than the
magnitude of positive-sequence current.
Trip and Alarm Delay (1)....... 1.00 to 100.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
Measurement Method ........... DFT
(1)
Single set point applies to Trip and Alarm.
5.11 UNDERCURRENT
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Undercurrent
Undercurrent protection is loss-of-load protection and is
active when the motor is in the Run mode. A trip or alarm
is initiated if current remains below the set point for the
programmed delay.
Trip Level ............................. 0.10 to 1.00 x FLA
Trip Delay ............................ 1.00 to 100.00 s
Alarm Level ......................... 0.10 to 1.00 x FLA
Alarm Delay ......................... 1.00 to 100.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
Measurement Method ........... DFT
5.12 OVERVOLTAGE
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Overvoltage
A trip or alarm occurs if the maximum line-to-line
voltage exceeds the set point.
Trip Level............................. 1.00 to 1.40 x System
Voltage Rating (Vp)
Trip Delay ............................ 1.00 to 500.00 s
Alarm Level ......................... 1.00 to 1.40 x Vp
Alarm Delay ......................... 1.00 to 500.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
Measurement Method .......... DFT
5.13 VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Unbalance (V)
Positive-sequence voltage (V1) and negative-sequence
voltage (V2) are used to determine voltage unbalance
(V2/V1). The unbalance display range is 0.00 to 1.00 where
1.00 is 100% unbalance—a single-phase condition. A
negative unbalance will be indicated if voltage inputs are
connected B-A-C.
Trip Level............................. 0.05 to 1.00
Trip Delay ............................ 1.00 to 100.00 s
Alarm Level ......................... 0.05 to 1.00
Alarm Delay ......................... 1.00 to 100.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
Measurement Method .......... DFT
5.14 PHASE LOSS—VOLTAGE
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Phase Loss (V)
Phase loss is a severe form of unbalance. When phase
loss occurs, negative-sequence voltage (V2) is equal to
positive-sequence voltage (V1) and voltage unbalance is
100% or 1.00 pu. The phase-loss algorithm considers
V2/V1 from 0.90 to 1.00 to be a phase loss. Set the phaseloss trip delay lower than the unbalance trip delay to avoid
an unbalance trip in the event of a phase loss.
Trip Delay ............................ 1.00 to 100.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Measurement Method .......... DFT
5.15 PHASE REVERSE—VOLTAGE
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Phase Rev (V)
If the voltage phase sequence is B-A-C, the magnitude
of the negative-sequence voltage will be larger than the
magnitude of the positive-sequence voltage.
Trip and Alarm Delay (1) ...... 1.00 to 100.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
Measurement Method .......... DFT
(1)
Single set point applies to Trip and Alarm.
Protective Functions
MPS Motor Protection System
5.16 UNDERVOLTAGE
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Undervoltage
A trip or alarm occurs if the minimum line-to-line
voltage is less than the set point.
Trip Level ............................. 0.50 to 1.00 x System
Voltage Rating (Vp)
Trip Delay ............................ 1.00 to 500.00 s
Alarm Level ......................... 0.50 to 1.00 x Vp
Alarm Delay ......................... 1.00 to 500.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
Measurement Method ........... DFT
5.17 UNDERPOWER
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Underpower
Apparent power (S) is defined by S = P + jQ. A trip or
alarm is initiated when the real power (P) magnitude
remains below the set point for the programmed delay.
Protection is enabled when the motor is in the Run mode.
See Section 7.2.
The Underpower setting is in per unit of rated power
where 1.00 pu is defined as the System Voltage x FLA
Rating x √3. The absolute value of power is used.
Trip Level ............................. 0.10 to 1.00
Trip Delay ............................ 0.50 to 500.00 s
Alarm Level ......................... 0.10 to 1.00
Alarm Delay ......................... 0.50 to 500.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
5.18 REVERSEPOWER
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Reversepower
Apparent power (S) is defined by S = P + jQ. A trip or
alarm is initiated when the real reverse power (P)
magnitude (negative power) is higher than the set point for
the programmed delay. See Section 7.2.
The Reversepower setting is in per unit of rated power
where 1.00 pu is defined as the System Voltage x FLA
Rating x √3. The magnitude of the negative power is used
and protection is only active when negative power is
detected.
Trip Level ............................. 0.10 to 1.00
Trip Delay ............................ 0.50 to 500.00 s
Alarm Level ......................... 0.10 to 1.00
Alarm Delay ......................... 0.50 to 500.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
Page 5-7
Rev. 6-E-030116
5.19 POWER FACTOR—QUADRANT 4
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | PF Quandrant4
OPI Menu: Setup | System Config | Ip Threshold
A trip or alarm occurs if the absolute value of power
factor in quadrant 4 is less than the set point. In quadrant
4, both Watts and Vars are positive (Importing).
Power-factor protection is active when the motor is in
the Run mode. Run mode is defined in Section 5.1.
The Ip Threshold sets the point where power-factor
protection becomes active.
Trip Level............................. 0.50 to 1.00
Trip Delay ............................ 0.20 to 500.00 s
Alarm Level ......................... 0.50 to 1.00
Alarm Delay ......................... 0.20 to 500.00 s
IP Threshold.......................... 0.10 to 0.50 x CT-primary
rating (IP)
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
5.20 POWER FACTOR—QUADRANT 3
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | PF Quandrant3
OPI Menu: Setup | System Config | Ip Threshold
A trip or alarm occurs if the absolute value of power
factor in quadrant 3 is less than the set point. In quadrant
3, Watts are negative (Exporting) and Vars are positive
(Importing).
Power-factor protection is active when the motor is in
the Run mode. Run mode is defined in Section 5.1.
The Ip Threshold sets the point where power-factor
protection becomes active.
Trip Level............................. 0.50 to 1.00
Trip Delay ............................ 0.20 to 500.00 s
Alarm Level ......................... 0.50 to 1.00
Alarm Delay ......................... 0.20 to 500.00 s
IP Threshold.......................... 0.10 to 0.50 x CT-primary
rating (IP)
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
5.21 UNDERFREQUENCY
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Underfrequency
A trip or alarm occurs when the frequency of the input
voltage (VA) is below the set point.
Underfrequency protection is inhibited when the input
voltage is less than 50% of rated input (Vp).
Trip Level............................. 30.00 to 80.00 Hz
Trip Delay ............................ 0.50 to 500.00 s
Alarm Level ......................... 30.00 to 80.00 Hz
Alarm Delay ......................... 0.5 to 500.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
Protective Functions
Page 5-8
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
5.22 OVERFREQUENCY
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Overfrequency
A trip or alarm occurs when the frequency of the input
voltage (VA) is above the set point.
Overfrequency protection is inhibited when the input
voltage is less than 50% of rated input (Vp).
Trip Level ............................. 30.00 to 80.00 Hz
Trip Delay ............................ 0.50 to 500.00 s
Alarm Level ......................... 30.00 to 80.00 Hz
Alarm Delay ......................... 0.50 to 500.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
5.23 STARTS PER HOUR / TIME BETWEEN STARTS
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Starts Per Hour
Starts-Per-Hour and Time-Between-Starts are useful
limits in a protective relay that incorrectly responds to
current below FLA. If the relay’s thermal model accurately
tracks a motor’s used thermal capacity under all conditions,
Starts-Per-Hour and Time-Between-Starts are features that
provide no additional protection. The MPS does not
require these features to provide protection, but they are
included to satisfy protection strategies designed for
protective relays without dynamic thermal modeling.
The Starts-Per-Hour feature ensures that the
programmed number of starts per hour is not exceeded and
the Time-Between-Starts feature ensures that the
programmed time has elapsed between starts. The
available number of starts and time between starts is also a
function of the thermal model’s Used I2t value.
Consequently, the allowed number of starts may be less
than the starts-per-hour value and the time between starts
may be longer than the set-point value.
The number of starts and time between starts is checked
when the motor is stopped. A Starts/Hour Trip or
Starts/Hour Alarm is issued if a start will exceed the
# Starts Per Hour setting or if the time since the previous
start is less than the Time Between setting.
When a Starts/Hour Trip or Starts/Hour Alarm is issued,
the output relay assigned to Start Inhibit is energized. The
Start Inhibit relay is non-latching and can be used as a start
permissive. A Starts/Hour Trip will remain latched until a
reset is issued. The Start Inhibit relay is shared with the
thermal model’s I2t Inhibit feature.
If motor current is detected regardless of the alarm or
trip condition, the Starts/Hour Alarm is removed, and
Starts/Hour Trip can be reset. The starts-per-hour
algorithm remains active but any trips or alarms are
suppressed until the motor is stopped.
The status of Starts-Per-Hour and Time-Between-Starts
is displayed in the Metering | Thermal Capacity menu. If
there are no trips or alarms, the number of available starts
(Sph Available) is displayed and if a trip or alarm is present,
the inhibit time (Sph Inhibit) is displayed. Since the
Metering | Thermal Capacity menu is also used to display
the thermal model status, messages are prioritized as
follows:
I2t Reset Time(1)
I2t Trip Time(1)
I2t Inhibit Time(1)
Starts Per Hour Inhibit Time(3)
Starts Available(2) (3)
An Emergency Thermal Reset (ETR) can be used to
initialize all thermal and starts-per-hour variables and to
reset a starts-per-hour trip. See Section 5.2.3.
Time Between Starts .........0.00 to 500.00 Minutes
Starts Per Hour(2) ...............1 to 10
Protection ..........................Enable/Disable Trip 1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm 1, 2, 3
(1)
(2)
(3)
Calculated from thermal model data.
The display range for the number of available starts is
-9 to +10.
Initialized when supply voltage is cycled.
5.24 FAILURE TO ACCELERATE AND UNDERSPEED
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Underspeed
OPI Menu: Setup | 4-20 Analog In | Input Function
OPI Menu: Setup | Digital Inputs | Tachometer
Failure-to-accelerate and underspeed protection are
available if the MPS has a tachometer signal. The
tachometer signal can originate from the High Speed Input
(HSI) or the analog input. If the analog input is set to
Motor Speed, it is used as the input to the algorithm,
otherwise the digital tachometer (HSI) is used. The failureto-accelerate algorithm is activated whenever a start is
detected. Start detection is based on motor current. Set
points 1 to 3 (for both speed and time) are sequentially
checked to confirm acceleration.
Motor at Full Speed (refer to Type T28, Bit 2 in
Appendix F) will be set when the measured tachometer
speed exceeds the Speed 3 threshold setting and the
Underspeed protection feature is enabled. If the Speed 3
threshold is not reached within Time 3, the MPS will trip
on failure-to-accelerate.
While running, the tachometer signal is continuously
measured and a trip occurs if the speed falls below the
Speed 3 setting.
Time 1 must be set less than or equal to Time 2 and Time
2 must be set less than or equal to Time 3.
To enable display of the speed in the Metering System
State menu, select Enable in the Setup Digital Input
Tachometer Enable/Disable menu, when the HSI input
is used.
Speed 1 ................................. 1.00 to 100% Sync Speed
Time 1 .................................. 1.00 to 1000.00 s
Speed 2 ................................. 1.00 to 100% Sync Speed
Time 2 .................................. 1.00 to 1000.00 s
Speed 3 ................................. 1.00 to 100% Sync Speed
Time 3 .................................. 1.00 to 1000.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Protective Functions
MPS Motor Protection System
5.25 DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT PROTECTION
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | Differential
OPI Menu: Setup | Hardware | DIF Module
OPI Menu: Setup | System Ratings | DF-CT Primary
The MPS-DIF provides three-phase differential
protection. It is intended to be used specifically for motor
protection and not intended for feeder or transformer
differential protection.
Enable the module and communications-loss protection
using the Setup Hardware DIF Module menu. The
module uses I/O module communications and both trip and
alarm actions are available in the event of communications
loss.
Set DF-CT Primary equal to the differential-CT-primary
rating. For the MPS summation connection, PH-CT Primary
and DF-CT Primary must be equal.
Trip and alarm settings are based on multiples of the DFCT Primary rating (Id).
Trip Level ............................. 0.10 to 15.00 x Id
Trip Delay ............................ 0.00 to 10.00 s
Alarm Level ......................... 0.10 to 15.00 x Id
Alarm Delay ......................... 0.00 to 10.00 s
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1,2,3
Enable/Disable Alarm1,2,3
Measurement Method ........... DFT c/w CT saturation
compensation.
5.26 PTC TEMPERATURE
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | PTC Temperature
A positive-temperature-coefficient (PTC) thermistor
input is provided on the MPS-CTU. The total resistance of
series-connected PTC thermistors must be less than 1,500
at 20°C (68F). A trip or alarm will occur when series
resistance exceeds 2,900 .
NOTE: During Emergency Thermal Reset, a PTC trip is
reset and PTC-temperature protection is disabled. See
Section 5.2.3.
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable Trip1, 2, 3
Enable/Disable Alarm1, 2, 3
5.27 RTD TEMPERATURE
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | RTD Temperature
OPI Menu: Setup | Hardware | RTD Module
Up to three RTD modules can be connected to the MPSCTU. Select the number of modules in the Setup |
Hardware | RTD Modules menu. Each module can monitor
eight RTD’s for a total of twenty-four RTD’s. RTD type,
function, and trip and alarm set points are programmable
for each RTD.
When an RTD type is selected, trip and alarm functions
are determined by Temperature Trip and Alarm settings.
During Emergency Thermal Reset, an RTD trip is reset
and RTD-temperature protection is disabled.
See
Section 5.2.3.
RTD failure detection is provided. The actions for an
RTD failure are selectable as Trip1, 2, or 3 and as Alarm1,
2, or 3. The selections apply to all RTD's.
Page 5-9
Rev. 6-E-030116
The MPS supports three MPS-RTD modules with each
module supporting eight RTDs. Each RTD can be assigned
to one of eight function groups; Stator, Bearing, Load,
Ambient, Stator Voting, Bearing Voting, Load Voting, and
Ambient Voting. The specific assignment is set using the
Setup | Protection | RTD Temperature | Module x |
Function menu. Regardless of the assigned function,
individual RTD trip and alarm setpoints remain active.
When an RTD is assigned to a voting group, it
participates in the voting logic. Within a voting group, two
RTDs must indicate a temperature above their trip setpoint
in order to cause a trip. The first two RTDs that indicate a
high temperature will generate a trip. Subsequent trips
resulting from other RTDs in the group are not locked out.
Trips must be individually reset and all trips must be reset
to allow a start.
Failed sensors do not participate in the RTD voting
logic. For example if six sensors are set to Stator Voting
and two sensors fail, only four participate in RTD voting.
When RTD voting is used, it is assumed that continuity of
service is of high importance. In this case it is
recommended to set the sensor-failure action to alarm only
or to set the trip action to a value different than the
Temperature Trip Action.
If only one RTD is assigned to a group, or if only one
RTD is active because of sensor failures, RTD protection
is the same as the corresponding non-voting function. RTD
voting is not available for alarm setpoints.
RTD voting is contained within the specific function
group and within the RTD module. An RTD in one module
does not participate in the voting logic of another module.
Name .................................... 18 Character, Alphanumeric
Type ..................................... Disable, Pt100, Ni100,
Ni120, Cu10
Function ............................... Stator, Bearing, Load,
Ambient,Stator Voting,
Bearing Voting, Load
Voting, Ambient Voting
Trip Range ........................... 40.00 to 200.00°C (104F to
392F)
Alarm Range ........................ 40.00 to 200.00°C (104F to
392F)
Display Range ...................... -40.00 to 200.00°C (-40F to
392F)
Error Codes .......................... -100 = No Sensor
-90 = Open Sensor
-80 = Shorted Sensor
-70 = No Data/Module Error
(Codes accessed via network
communications)
Protective Functions
MPS Motor Protection System
5.28 HOT-MOTOR COMPENSATION
OPI Menu: Setup | Protection | RTD Temperature
If hot-motor compensation (HMC) is enabled, the
maximum stator-RTD temperature is used to bias the
thermal model by increasing Used I2t when the RTD
temperature is greater than the thermal-model temperature.
Two set points are used to define the compensation. See
Fig. 5.3. HMC Minimum Bias is the stator temperature
where compensation begins at 0% I2t. HMC Maximum
Bias is the stator temperature where compensation ends at
100% I2t.
Although the bias calculation is based on 0% and 100%
I2t values, the Used I2t adjustment is limited to 90% I2t. An
actual overload condition is required to cause a trip at
100% I2t.
100%
Page 5-10
Rev. 6-E-030116
Low Level Trip .................... 0.10 to 20.00 mA
Trip Delay ............................ 0.01 to 100.00 s
High Level Alarm ................ 0.10 to 20.00 mA
Low Level Alarm ................. 0.10 to 20.00 mA
Alarm Delay ......................... 0.01 to 100.00 s
5.29.2 SYNCHRONIZE TO ASD
OPI Menu: Setup | 4-20 Analog In | Sync to ASD
When Sync to ASD is selected, the MPS uses the
4-20-mA input to set the internal sampling rate for current
and voltage inputs so that protection and metering
functions use accurate RMS and DFT values from 10.00 to
70.00 Hz.
4-mA Frequency (lower) ...... 0.00 to 70.00 Hz
20-mA Frequency (upper) .... 0.00 to 70.00 Hz
Frequency Range ................. 10.00 to 70.00 Hz
RTD BIAS 12t
5.29.3 MOTOR SPEED
OPI Menu: Setup | 4-20 Analog In | Motor Speed
When the analog-input type is selected as Motor Speed,
the 4-20-mA analog input is used as the speed input. This
selection overrides the selections for the high-speed
tachometer input and failure-to-accelerate protection uses
the analog input as the source of speed information.
0%
HMC MIN BIAS
HMC MAX BIAS
RTD TEMPERATURE
FIGURE 5.3 Used I2t Bias Curve.
HMC Minimum Bias ............ 40.00 to 200.00°C (104F to
392F)
HMC Maximum Bias ........... 40.00 to 200.00°C (104F to
392F)
Protection ............................. Enable/Disable
NOTE: Hot-motor compensation will not be active unless
the HMC High set point is at least 10°C above the HMC
Low set point.
4-mA Speed ......................... 0.00 to 100% Sync Speed
20-mA Speed ....................... 0.00 to 100% Sync Speed
5.29.4 METERING ONLY
When the analog-input type is selected as Metering
Only, an analog input does not affect MPS operation, but
its value can be observed in the Metering menu and with a
communications network.
5.29 ANALOG INPUT
OPI Menu: Setup | Analog Input | 4–20 Input Type
The analog input function is selectable as Metering
Only, Protection, Sync to ASD, or Motor Speed.
5.29.1 PROTECTION
OPI Menu: Setup | 4-20 Analog In | Protection
The protection input has high-level and low-level trip
and alarm set points. A high-level trip or alarm occurs
when the 4-20-mA input exceeds the high-level trip or
alarm set point, and a low-level trip or alarm occurs when
the 4-20-mA input is lower than the low-level trip or alarm
set point.
Trip action is fixed at Trip1 and alarm action is fixed at
Alarm1.
High Level Trip .................... 0.10 to 20.00 mA
Protective Functions
Page 6-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
6. STARTER FUNCTIONS
OPI Menu: Setup | Starter
6.1 GENERAL
All common starter types are supported. From the OPI
Starter Type menu, select one of seventeen starter types or
select Protection Only. Starter types requiring two FLA
settings are indicated by the “x” symbol in the OPI display.
When Protection Only is selected, all starter functions
except STOP are disabled and all OPI control-select LED’s
will be off. Any STOP signal will initiate a Trip1 when the
MPS is in Protection Only.
forward-direction limit switch is connected to the Limit1
Stop input and the reverse-direction limit switch is
connected to the Limit2 Stop input.
With this control method, a Start1 requires limit switch
1 to be closed and limit switch 2 is ignored. In a similar
manner, Start2 requires, limit switch 2 to be closed while
limit switch 1 is ignored.
NOTE: When starter functions are used, protective
functions with the trip action set to Trip1 will cause the
starter to stop when a trip occurs. Reset is required.
Table 6.1 indicates the available start sources.
NOTE: When Protection Only is selected, STOP will not
function if Trip1 is not assigned to a relay output.
When Protection Only is selected, the OPI STOP and
RUN LED’s are controlled by motor current. When motor
current is below the minimum Current Threshold defined
in Section 3.2.1.2, the STOP LED is on and RUN LED is
off. When motor current is above the minimum Current
Threshold, the STOP LED is off and RUN LED is on.
When a starter type is selected, the STOP and RUN LED’s
are under starter control and not based on motor current.
When a starter type is selected, starter control can be
performed with the digital inputs, OPI, or network
communications. See Section 4.3.3 for details on selecting
start sources.
Three control modes are available and selected using the
OPI CONTROL SELECT key. In addition, a digital input
can be used to select LOCAL. Each control mode has
specific start sources that can be programmed as shown in
Table 6.1. REMOTE control can be configured to operate
with start sources from the digital input, OPI and the
network. OPI Control uses the OPI start keys as the start
sources. LOCAL control uses the Local Start1 or Local
Start2 start sources or the OPI. In LOCAL mode, OPI
control can be enabled or disabled. Control selection is
indicated by the REMOTE, OPI, and LOCAL LED’s on
the OPI.
The digital inputs allow concurrent operation of three
start-control methods; 3-wire start/stop, 2-wire start/stop,
and 3-wire local start/stop. Three-wire control requires
two digital inputs, one programmed for Start1 or Start2
(N.O. momentary start switch) and one programmed for
Stop (N.C. momentary stop switch) as shown in Fig. 6.1.
Two-wire control uses one input, programmed as 2-Wire
Start1 or 2-Wire Start2, for start/stop control and can be
used where a single contact provides start/stop operation.
See Fig. 6.2. If a start was activated by a 2-wire start input,
any other STOP will initiate a latching Trip1. In all other
cases, STOP does not cause a trip.
Digital inputs programmed for Limit1 Stop and Limit2
Stop are used to provide stop control for Start1 and Start2.
This is typically used in reversing starter applications. The
TABLE 6.1 START-SOURCE SUMMARY (1)
CONTROL (7)
SELECTION
START SOURCE
Start1 Input (3-wire control)
Start2 Input (3-wire control)
2-W Start1 (2-wire control) (4)
2-W Start2 (2-wire control) (4)
START1
Key
OPI (3)
START2 Key
NETWORK Start1 Command
(3)
Start2 Command
OPI START1 Key
OPI START2 Key
DIGITAL
Local Start1 (3-wire)
INPUTS
Local Start2 (3-wire)
START1 Key
(8)
OPI
START2 Key
DIGITAL
INPUTS (3)
REMOTE (2)
OPI
LOCAL
(5) (6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
All STOP sources are always enabled.
Factory default has all sources enabled and REMOTE
selected.
Can be enabled or disabled using the Setup | Starters |
Remote Group menu.
STOP causes a latching trip.
LOCAL can also be selected by a network command
or by a digital input programmed for Local Select.
Each Local Select source must de-select local control
for the MPS to return to the previous control setting.
I2t Start Inhibit, Starts per Hour alarms and Interlocks
are bypassed.
At least one Control Selection must be enabled even
when Protection Only is selected.
Can be enabled or disabled using the Setup | Starters
| Local Group menu.
Up to four timers (Stage 1 to 3 Delay, and Start Time)
control the start sequence. These timers control Starter
RLYA, Starter RLYB, Starter RLYC, and Starter RLYD as
shown in the timing diagrams in Section 6.2. These
functions can be assigned to any output relay. Digital
inputs can be programmed to monitor contactor status.
Contactor status corresponding to Starter RLYA, Starter
RLYB, Starter RLYC, and Starter RLYD outputs are
designated as RLYA Status, RLYB Status, RLYC Status, and
Starter Functions
MPS Motor Protection System
RLYD Status. The MPS will issue a Trip1 and indicate
Relay Status Trip if the status contact does not follow
within 500 ms of the command to operate the respective
relay output. In addition, a transition must not occur prior
to its intended time.
When the starting sequence is complete, contactor status
is checked every 500 ms and a Relay Status Trip will occur
if the status changes.
NOTE: Relay Status is not checked when the starter is in
the stopped state.
The Start Time set point is the maximum start time
allowed. The starting process will terminate and generate
a Trip1 unless current is between 1.5 x (CT-Primary Rating
/ FLA) and 125% FLA when the Start Time timer times
out.
In reduced-voltage-starting applications, the MPS can
use time-based or current-based transfer from the starting
to the running connection. The transfer type is selected as
Time Transfer or Current Transfer using the Transfer Type
menu.
When Current Transfer is selected, the start-connection
delay (Stage 1 Delay or Stage 2 Delay, see Table 6.2 and
Figs 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, and 6.8) defines the minimum startingconnection time. The transfer to the run connection occurs
when the start-connection delay has expired and current is
below the Transfer Current. When current is above the
Transfer Current, the transfer will be delayed up to the
maximum time defined by the Start Time. If current is
below 1.5 x (CT-Primary Rating / FLA) when the startconnection delay expires or if the Start Time is exceeded,
the MPS will issue a Trip1 and indicate Starter Trip.
When Time Transfer is selected, the start-connection
delay set point (Stage 1 Delay or Stage 2 Delay) is used to
determine the transfer time. Transfer to the run connection
occurs after the start-connection delay has expired.
In both current- and time-transfer modes, the MPS will
issue a Trip1 and indicate Starter Trip if load current is
above 125% FLA or below 1.5 x (CT-Primary Rating /
FLA) when the Start Time expires. The Start Time set
point must be long enough to allow the starting sequence
to complete and for the motor current to drop below 125%
FLA.
Table 6.2 summarizes starter types and shows which
starter set points are active.
The backspin timer is available when a delay is required
between starts. The backspin timer is enabled in the BkSpin
En/Disable menu, and the delay time is set in the Backspin
Delay menu. The backspin timer is activated by a STOP
or when supply voltage is cycled on the MPS. While the
backspin timer is on, the Backspin Timer On message is
displayed in the Status Message menu and starts are not
allowed.
The connection diagrams, Figs. 6.9 to 6.23, show typical
control circuits with 120-Vac contactor coils and the 24-
Page 6-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
Vdc source on the MPS-CTU used for status contacts.
Other supply voltages can be used within the limits of the
digital-input and relay-contact ratings. The use of status
contacts is optional.
NOTE: Stop and start control, electrical interlocks, and
mechanical interlocks are not shown in connection
diagrams.
NOTE: Connection diagrams show typical output relay
assignments that must be set using the Setup Relay
Outputs Relay x Relay x Function menu.
NOTE: To cancel a long backspin time, enter new backspin
parameters and restart the MPS using the Setup System
Config Maintenance Restart MPS-CTU menu or cycle
supply voltage.
Starter Functions
Page 6-3
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
SEQ.
NO.
STARTER TYPE
Full-Voltage Non-Reversing
Adjustable-Speed Drive
Soft-Start
Full-Voltage Reversing
Two-Speed Two-Winding
Reactor or Resistor ClosedTransition (4)
Slip-Ring (4)
Part-Winding (4)
Double-Delta (4)
Soft-Start-with-Bypass (4)
Reactor or Resistor OpenTransition (4)
Two-Winding (4)
Wye-Delta Open-Transition (4)
Autotransformer ClosedTransition (4)
Wye-Delta Closed-Transition (4)
(1) TIMERS
1: Stage 1 Delay
2: Stage 2 Delay
3: Stage 3 Delay
4: Start Time
(4)
TABLE 6.2 STARTER SUMMARY
STARTACTIVE FLA
SETPOINTS (2)
TIMERS CONNECTION
(1)
TIMER
USED
FLA
FLA 2
NUMBER (1)
1
1
1
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
1,4
1
x
x
x
x
x
x
4
1,4
1,4
1,4
1,4
1,4
1
1
1
1
1
x
x
x
x
x
4
5
5
1,4
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
1
2
2
x
x
x
6
1,2,4
3
3
3
3
3
2
x
FLA SETPOINTS
FLA: Full-Load Current
FLA2: Full-Load Current 2
(2)
RELAYS AND CONTACTOR STATUS (3)
RLYA RLYB RLYC RLYD
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
RELAYS AND CONTACTOR STATUS
Starter RLYA, Starter RLYB, Starter RLYC, and
Starter RLYD are not automatically assigned. The
user must assign these functions to individual relays.
Status is assignable to any digital input.
(3)
Current transfer capability when enabled
N
COM
+
43
41
24 VDC
START 1
L
START 2
STOP
IN1 44
-
42
IN2 45
COM
43
IN3 46
START 1
START 2
STOP
AC INPUT
IN1 44
IN2 45
IN3 46
DC INPUT
FIGURE 6.1 Typical 3-Wire Control.
Starter Functions
Page 6-4
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
N
COM
43
+
41
24 VDC
START 1
IN1
44
-
42
IN2
45
COM
43
IN1
44
IN2
45
L
START 2
START 1
START 2
AC INPUT
DC INPUT
FIGURE 6.2 Typical 2-Wire Control.
6.2 STARTER TIMING SEQUENCES
The MPS uses one of six timing sequences to implement the various starter types. These time-based starter sequences are
shown in Figs. 6.3 to 6.8.
START1/START2
Starter RLYA
Start Time
FIGURE 6.3 Starter Sequence 1.
START1
STOP
START2
STOP
START1
Starter RLYA
Start Time
Start Time
Starter RLYB
Start Time
FIGURE 6.4 Starter Sequence 2.
Starter Functions
Page 6-5
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
START1/START2
Starter RLYA
Transition may be delayed
if Current Transfer is enabled.
Stage1 Delay
Starter RLYB
Start Time
FIGURE 6.5 Starter Sequence 3.
Transition may be delayed
if Current Transfer is enabled.
START1/START2
Starter RLYA
Stage1 Delay
Stage2 Delay
Starter RLYB
Start Time
FIGURE 6.6 Starter Sequence 4.
Starter Functions
Page 6-6
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
START1/START2
Stage2 Delay
Transition may be delayed
if Current Transfer is enabled.
Starter RLYC
Stage1 Delay
Starter RLYB
Stage3 Delay
Starter RLYA
Start Time
FIGURE 6.7 Starter Sequence 5.
START1/START2
Starter RLYC
Starter RLYB
Stage1 Delay
Stage1 Delay
Starter RLYA
Stage1 Delay
Stage1 Delay
Starter RLYD
Stage2 Delay
Transition may be delayed
if Current Transfer is enabled.
Start Time
FIGURE 6.8 Starter Sequence 6.
Starter Functions
Page 6-7
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
6.3 FULL-VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING STARTER
Sequence:
Fig. 6.3
Connection:
Fig. 6.9
Current Transfer:
Not available
ØA
START1 or START2 is the start command and Starter
RLYA is used as the output to control the contactor.
T1
ØB
T2
ASD
T3
ØC
K1
ØA
START INPUT
T1
4-20 mA
SPEED OUTPUT
TO MPS-CTU
RELAY 1
5
T2
ØB
6
STARTER RLYA
T3
ØC
120 VAC
L
5
6
STARTER RLYA
FIGURE 6.10 Adjustable-Speed-Drive Connection.
+
-
41
42
N
K1a
RELAY 1
K1
RELAY 1
RELAY 1
IN1
24 VDC
43
IN1 RLYA
44 STATUS
RLYA STATUS
FIGURE 6.9 Full-Voltage Non-Reversing-Starter
Connection.
6.4 ADJUSTABLE-SPEED DRIVE
Sequence:
Fig. 6.3
Connection:
Fig. 6.10
Current Transfer:
Not available
The MPS-CTU provides the start input to an adjustablespeed drive (ASD). START1 or START2 is the start
command and Starter RLYA is used as the output to control
the ASD.
The MPS-CTU has a 4-20 mA input that should be used
to synchronize its sampling rate to the ASD output
frequency so that all protection and metering values are
valid for an ASD output frequency from 10 to 70 Hz. In
ASD applications, voltage and current inputs must be
derived from the load side of the ASD, and undervoltage
protection must be disabled.
6.5 SOFT-START STARTER
Sequence:
Fig. 6.3
Connection:
Fig. 6.11
Current Transfer:
Not available
The MPS-CTU provides the start input to a solid-state
starter. START1 or START2 is the start command and
Starter RLYA is used as the output to control the starter.
ØA
ØB
T1
T2
SOFT
START
STARTER
ØC
T3
START INPUT
RELAY 1
5
STARTER RLYA
6
RELAY 1
FIGURE 6.11 Soft-Start-Starter Connection.
Starter Functions
Page 6-8
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
6.6 FULL-VOLTAGE REVERSING STARTER
Sequence:
Fig. 6.4
Connection:
Fig. 6.12
Current Transfer:
Not available
6.7 TWO-SPEED STARTER
Sequence:
Fig. 6.4
Connection:
Fig. 6.13, 6.14, and 6.15
Current Transfer:
Not available
The full-voltage reversing starter uses START1 to
activate Starter RLYA for forward control and START2 to
activate Starter RLYB for reverse control. RLYA Status is
the status corresponding to Starter RLYA and RLYB Status
is the status corresponding to Starter RLYB.
For OPI and 3-wire start/stop control, a direction change
requires a STOP command prior to a START1 or START2
command. For 2-wire control a STOP command is not
required.
Fig. 6.12 shows the use of forward and reverse limit
switches. When Start1 is issued, K1 is energized. If a STOP
is issued or LSF opens, K1 is de-energized. Provided LSR is
closed, Start2 will energize K2 to allow operation in the
reverse direction.
The two-speed starter uses START1 to activate Starter
RLYA for high-speed control and START2 to activate
Starter RLYB for low-speed control. RLYA Status is the
status corresponding to Starter RLYA and RLYB Status is
the status corresponding to Starter RLYB. A speed change
requires a STOP command prior to a START1 or START2
command. This starter can be used on motors with two
separate windings (Fig. 6.13) or on motors with
reconnectable windings (Figs. 6.14 and 6.15).
This starter requires two FLA settings. Use FLA Rating
for the high-speed connection and FLA Rating 2 for the
low-speed connection.
NOTE: Phase CT’s should be located upstream of the
contactors.
K1
ØA
K1
ØA
T11
ØB
T12
ØC
T13
HIGH SPEED
T1
K2
ØB
T2
ØC
T3
T1
T2
LOW SPEED
T3
K2
HIGH-SPEED FLA
FLA RATING
LOW-SPEED FLA
FLA RATING 2
42
+
41
L
120 VAC
RELAY 1
+
41
120 VAC
L
RELAY 1
5
RELAY 2
7
K2a
K2
STARTER RLYA
STARTER RLYB
IN1 RLYA
LSF
IN1
RLYA STATUS
IN2
RLYB STATUS
IN3
LIMIT1 STOP
IN4
LIMIT2 STOP
LSR
8
HIGH
43
K1a IN1
RLYA
44 STATUS
K1
LOW
K2
K2a IN2
RLYB
45 STATUS
STARTER RLYA
RELAY 1
IN1
RLYA STATUS
STARTER RLYB
RELAY 2
IN2
RLYB STATUS
STATUS
IN3
3 LIMIT1
STOP
RELAY 2
7
24 VDC
STATUS
IN2 RLYB
45
RELAY 1
6
43
44
REVERSE
5
RELAY 2
K1a
K1
8
42
N
FORWARD
6
24 VDC
N
FIGURE 6.13 Two-Speed Two-Winding-Starter
Connection.
IN4 LIMIT2
STOP
FIGURE 6.12 Full-Voltage-Reversing-Starter
Connection.
Starter Functions
Page 6-9
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
K3
ØA
T1
ØB
T2
ØC
T3
T4
T4
T3
K1
T6
T2
T5
T1
T3
T1
K2
T2
T5
T6
T6
T4
CONSTANT TORQUE
VARIABLE TORQUE
T5
L
+
N
120 VAC
41
-
24 VDC
RELAY 1
5
K1a K2a IN1
K1
6
44
HIGH
K2
LOW
K3
RELAY 2
7
K3a
8
42
HIGH-SPEED FLA
FLA RATING
43
LOW-SPEED FLA
FLA RATING 2
RLYA
STATUS
IN2 RLYB
45 STATUS
STARTER RLYA
RELAY 1
STARTER RLYB
RELAY 2
IN1
RLYA STATUS
IN2
RLYB STATUS
FIGURE 6.14 Two-Speed Constant- and Variable-Torque-Starter Connections.
K3
ØA
T1
ØB
T2
ØC
T3
T4
T3
K2
K1
T1
T6
T4
T5
T5
-
+
120 VAC
L
RELAY 1
5
6
HIGH
8
24 VDC
K1a
K1
RELAY 2
7
N
41
K2
LOW
T6
T2
K2a K3a
42
43
IN1 RLYA
44 STATUS
IN2 RLYB
45 STATUS
K3
HIGH-SPEED FLA
FLA RATING
LOW-SPEED FLA
FLA RATING 2
STARTER RLYA
RELAY 1
STARTER RLYB
RELAY 2
IN1
RLYA STATUS
IN2
RLYB STATUS
FIGURE 6.15 Two-Speed Constant-Horsepower-Starter Connection.
Starter Functions
Page 6-10
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
6.9 SLIP-RING STARTER
Sequence:
Fig. 6.5
Connection:
Fig. 6.17
Current Transfer:
Available
6.8 REACTOR OR RESISTOR CLOSED-TRANSITION
STARTER
Sequence:
Fig. 6.5
Connection:
Fig. 6.16
Current Transfer:
Available
This starter uses a reactor or resistor to provide reducedvoltage starting and the reactor or resistor contactor (K1)
remains closed during running.
START1 or START2 initiates the starting sequence by
activating Starter RLYA. Starter RLYB activates after the
Stage1 Delay.
The slip-ring starter is a single-stage wound-rotor starter
with a single contactor (K2) controlling the rotor resistor
bank.
START1 or START2 initiates the starting sequence by
activating Starter RLYA. Starter RLYB activates after the
Stage1 Delay.
K1
ØA
K2
T1
K2
K1
ØA
T1
ZA
ØB
ØB
T2
ØC
T3
M
T2
ZB
-
+
ØC
T3
ZC
L
120 VAC
N
RELAY 1
5
6
K1a
K1
RELAY 2
7
8
K2a
K2
120 VAC
N
RELAY 1
-
+
41
L
41
24 VDC
IN1 RLYA
44 STATUS
IN2
45
42
43
RLYB
STATUS
STARTER RLYA
RELAY 1
IN1
RLYA STATUS
STARTER RLYB
RELAY 2
IN2
RLYB STATUS
5
6
K1a
K1
RELAY 2
7
8
K2a
K2
24 VDC
IN1 RLYA
44 STATUS
IN2
42
43
RLYB
45 STATUS
STARTER RLYA
RELAY 1
IN1
RLYA STATUS
STARTER RLYB
RELAY 2
IN2
RLYB STATUS
FIGURE 6.17 Slip-Ring-Starter Connection.
FIGURE 6.16 Reactor or Resistor-Starter Connection.
Starter Functions
Page 6-11
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
6.10 PART-WINDING AND DOUBLE-DELTA STARTERS
Sequence:
Fig. 6.5
Connection:
Fig. 6.18
Current Transfer:
Available
START1 or START2 initiates the starting sequence by
activating Starter RLYA. Starter RLYB activates after the
Stage1 Delay.
Both starters require two FLA settings. FLA Rating 2 is
the full-load current for the starting connection and FLA
Rating is the full-load current for the running connection.
The part-winding starter is used on motors with two
stator windings and the double-delta starter has a delta
winding that is parallel connected during running.
K1
ØA
T1
T1
T1
T2
T7
T8
T7
ØB
T2
T9
T8
T8
ØC
T3
T9
T3
T9
T3
T2
T7
DOUBLE DELTA
PART WINDING
K2
K1
ØA
T7
T1, T7
T10
T10
T1
T4
ØB
T2, T8
K2
T12
T12
ØC
T5
T2
T8
T6 T11
T11
T3, T9
T9
T3
ALTERNATE PART-WINDING CONNECTION
-
+
L
120 VAC
RELAY 1
5
6
RELAY 2
7
8
N
41
K1a
K1
K2a
K2
24 VDC
IN1 RLYA
44 STATUS
IN2
42
43
RLYB
45 STATUS
HIGH-SPEED FLA
FLA RATING 2
LOW-SPEED FLA
FLA RATING
STARTER RLYA
RELAY 1
STARTER RLYB
RELAY 2
IN1
RLYA STATUS
IN2
RLYB STATUS
FIGURE 6.18 Part-Winding and Double-Delta-Starter Connections.
Starter Functions
Page 6-12
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
6.11 SOFT-START-WITH-BYPASS STARTER
Sequence:
Fig. 6.5
Connection:
Fig. 6.19
Current Transfer:
Available
START1 or START2 initiates the starting sequence by
activating Starter RLYA. Starter RLYB activates after the
Stage1 Delay to close the bypass contactor.
Although RLYA Status can be selected as a digital input,
it is not usually available for this starter.
For a soft-start where the bypass function is included, a
bypass signal from the soft-start can be used as an input to
the MPS. There are two solutions:
1) This option coordinates the MPS Starter RLYB
signal with the soft-start and ensures the status
input does not validate prior to the intended time.
Assign an MPS output relay with the Starter
RLYB function as per Fig. 6.19. Connect this
output-relay contact in series with the bypass
contact from the soft-start (K1a) and connect this
signal to a digital input programmed as RLYB
Status. Set the Stage 1 Delay longer than the softstart bypass time.
2) This option uses a digital input programmed as
Trip1 in conjunction with the MPS trip-bypass
feature. Connect the bypass signal from the softstart to a digital input assigned as Trip1. Enable
Trip Bypass and set the Bypass Delay longer than
the start time of the soft-start. Note that this
feature is based on current and during a stop
requires the input to remain valid until current is
not detected. If the soft-start has a ramp-down
feature, set the INx Trip Delay greater than the
ramp-down time to prevent a trip when the softstart stops. See Section 4.2.8.
START1 or START2 activates Starter RLYA for the
time specified by the Stage1 Delay. After Starter RLYA
de-activates for the Stage2 Delay, Starter RLYB activates.
This starter requires two full-load current set points.
FLA Rating 2 is the full-load current for the starting
connection (Starter RLYA) and FLA Rating is the full-load
current for the running connection (Starter RLYB).
6.14 WYE-DELTA OPEN-TRANSITION STARTER
Sequence:
Fig. 6.7
Connection:
Fig. 6.21
Current Transfer:
Available
START1 or START2 initiates the sequence. Starter
RLYC activates to close the neutral contactor (K3). Starter
RLYB activates the wye contactor (K2) after the Stage1
Delay. Starter RLYC de-activates to open the neutral
contactor after the Stage2 Delay and Starter RLYA
activates to close the delta contactor (K1) after the Stage3
Delay. Stage-1 and Stage-3 delays are contactor-transfer
times and should be set in the range of 0.1 to 0.5 seconds.
Locate CT’s on the line side of the starter.
This starter uses two full-load current settings. Set FLA
Rating to the delta full-load current and FLA Rating 2 to
the wye full-load current.
SOFT
START
STARTER
6.12 REACTOR OR RESISTOR OPEN-TRANSITION
STARTER
Sequence:
Fig. 6.6
Connection:
Fig. 6.16
Current Transfer:
Available
START1 or START2 activates Starter RLYA for the
duration of the Stage1 Delay. After Starter RLYA deactivates for the Stage2 Delay, Starter RLYB activates.
6.13 TWO-WINDING STARTER
Sequence:
Fig. 6.6
Connection:
Fig. 6.20
Current Transfer:
Available
START INPUT
RELAY 1
6
5
+
41
120 VAC
L
N
RELAY 2
7
8
K1a
K1
STARTER RLYA
RELAY 1
STARTER RLYB
RELAY 2
IN1
24 VDC
42
43
IN1 RLYB
44 STATUS
RLYB STATUS
FIGURE 6.19 Soft-Start-With-Bypass-Starter
Connection.
This starter is an open-transition starter for two-winding
motors that run with only one winding energized.
Starter Functions
MPS Motor Protection System
K1
6.16 WYE-DELTA CLOSED-TRANSITION STARTER
Sequence:
Fig. 6.8
Connection:
Fig. 6.23
Current Transfer:
Available
T1
T2
START
T3
K2
T7
T8
RUN
T9
RUNNING FLA
STARTING FLA
120 VAC
L
RELAY 1
5
6
RELAY 2
7
8
STARTER RLYA
STARTER RLYB
FLA RATING
FLA RATING 2
N
41
42
24 VDC
START
K1
K1a
RUN
K2
K2a
RELAY 1
IN1
RELAY 1
IN2
IN1 RLYA
44 STATUS
Page 6-13
Rev. 6-E-030116
43
START1 or START2 initiates the start sequence.
Starter RLYC activates to close the neutral contactor (K3).
Starter RLYB activates to close the wye contactor (K2)
after the Stage1 Delay. Starter RLYD activates to close the
resistor contactor (K4) after the Stage2 Delay. This is
followed by de-activation of Starter RLYC, activation of
Starter RLYA to close the main motor contactor (K1), and
de-activation of Starter RLYD, all displaced by the Stage1
Delay.
Locate CT’s on the line side of the starter. Set FLA
Rating to the delta full-load current and FLA Rating 2 to
the wye full-load current. Stage-1 delay is a contactortransfer time and should be set in the range of 0.1 to 0.5
seconds.
IN2 RLYB
45 STATUS
RLYA STATUS
RLYB STATUS
FIGURE 6.20 Two-Winding-Starter Connection.
6.15 AUTOTRANSFORMER CLOSED-TRANSITION
STARTER
Sequence:
Fig. 6.7
Connection:
Fig. 6.22
Current Transfer:
Available
START1 or START2 initiates the sequence. Starter
RLYC activates to close the neutral contactor (K3) on the
autotransformer. Starter RLYB activates to close the main
autotransformer contactor (K2) after the Stage1 Delay.
Starter RLYC de-activates to open the autotransformer
neutral contactor after the Stage2 Delay, and Starter RLYA
activates to close the main motor contactor (K1) after the
Stage3 Delay. Stage-1 and Stage-3 delays are contactortransfer times and should be set in the range of 0.1 to 0.5
seconds.
Starter Functions
Page 6-14
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
K2
ØA
T1
T3
T1
T6
T2
ØB
T5
T4
T3
ØC
T2
K3
K1
T6 T1
T5
T4
T3
T6
+
41
120 VAC
L
24 VDC
K1a
RELAY 1
5
K1
6
K2a IN2
K2
8
K3a IN3
RLYB
RLYC
46 STATUS
K3
10
RLYA
45 STATUS
RELAY 3
9
43
IN1
44 STATUS
RELAY 2
7
42
N
T4
T2
T5
DELTA FLA
FLA RATING
WYE FLA
FLA RATING 2
STARTER RLYA
RELAY 1
STARTER RLYB
RELAY 2
STARTER RLYC
RELAY 3
IN1
RLYA STATUS
IN2
IN3
RLYB STATUS
RLYC STATUS
FIGURE 6.21 Wye-Delta Open-Transition-Starter Connection.
K2
K3
K1
ØA
T1
ØB
T2
ØC
T3
120 VAC
L
RELAY 1
5
6
K1
8
10
43
IN1
RLYB
45 STATUS
K3a IN3
K3
RLYA
44 STATUS
K2a IN2
K2
RELAY 3
9
42
24 VDC
K1a
RELAY 2
7
N
+
41
STARTER RLYA
RELAY 1
STARTER RLYB
RELAY 2
STARTER RLYC
RELAY 3
IN1
RLYA STATUS
IN2
RLYB STATUS
IN3
RLYC STATUS
RLYC
46 STATUS
FIGURE 6.22 Autotransformer Closed-Transition-Starter Connection.
Starter Functions
Page 6-15
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
K2
ØA
T1
T3
T1
ØB
T2
ØC
T3
T5
T5
T6 T1
T6
T4
T2
K4
K1
K3
T4
T3
T6
+
120 VAC
L
K1
5
6
RELAY 2
7
8
K2
RELAY 3
9
10
K3
13
24 VDC
N
43
IN1
RLYA
44 STATUS
K4
DELTA FLA
FLA RATING
WYE FLA
FLA RATING 2
STARTER RLYA
RELAY 1
K2a IN2
STARTER RLYB
RELAY 2
K3a IN3
STARTER RLYC
STARTER RLYD
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RLYB
45 STATUS
RLYC
46 STATUS
K4a IN4
RELAY 4
12
42
41
K1a
RELAY 1
T4
T2
T5
RLYD
47 STATUS
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
RLYA STATUS
RLYB STATUS
RLYC STATUS
RLYD STATUS
FIGURE 6.23 Wye-Delta Closed-Transition-Starter Connection.
Starter Functions
MPS Motor Protection System
Page 6-16
Rev. 6-E-030116
This page intentionally left blank.
Starter Functions
Page 7-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
7. THEORY OF OPERATION
7.1 SIGNAL-PROCESSING ALGORITHMS
The sampling frequency of the MPS is variable. It can
be set for 50-Hz, 60-Hz, or variable-frequency
applications. The MPS obtains sixteen samples per cycle
of each current and voltage signal. For an adjustable-speed
drive (ASD) application, a speed or frequency output from
the ASD can be connected to the 4-20-mA input to
synchronize the sampling rate to the ASD output
frequency. This maintains accurate measurements of
power and sequential components.
The sampling rate is sixteen samples per cycle of the
fundamental frequency. A Discrete-Fourier-Transform
(DFT) algorithm is used to obtain the magnitude and phase
angles of the fundamental-frequency components of the
current and voltage waveforms. These values provide true
positive- and negative-sequence components. True RMS
values of line currents are calculated for use by the thermalmodel algorithm. RMS values include up to the 8th
harmonic. All calculated values are updated at the
sampling frequency to achieve a fast response to fault
conditions. RMS values of the fundamental components
of current and voltage are displayed.
The MPS uses the input voltage VA for frequency
measurement. The input voltage must be above 30 Vac and
a sixteen-cycle interval is used to determine frequency.
Frequency protection is inhibited when system voltage is
less than 50% of the System Voltage setting.
7.2 POWER ALGORITHM
Apparent power (S) is calculated by:
S P jQ
Real power (P) is determined from the in-phase
components of I and V, and reactive power (Q) is
determined from the quadrature components of I with
respect to V. Power factor is the magnitude of the ratio of
P to S.
The one-PT connection assumes balanced voltages for
power calculations. Power calculations for the other
connections are valid for both balanced and unbalanced
conditions. In all cases, power calculations use the twowattmeter method and assume 3-wire loads.
The IEEE convention is used for power displays:
+Watts, +Vars, -PF (Lag) Importing Watts,
Importing Vars
+Watts, -Vars, +PF (Lead) Importing Watts,
Exporting Vars
-Watts, -Vars, -PF (Lag) Exporting Watts,
Exporting Vars
-Watts, +Vars, +PF (Lead) Exporting Watts,
Importing Vars
7.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE (MPS-OPI)
The OPI is a terminal device used to communicate with
the MPS-CTU. All set points, operating parameters, and
menus are stored in the MPS-CTU.
The OPI contains a microprocessor used to
communicate with the MPS-CTU, read key presses, and
perform display functions.
On multiple-OPI systems, all OPI’s display the same
information. Key presses on any OPI will be processed by
the MPS-CTU.
7.4 RTD MODULE (MPS-RTD)
The RTD module contains a microprocessor, A/D
converter, and analog multiplexers used to measure up to
eight RTD’s. The RTD-measuring circuit is isolated from
the I/O Module network. All eight RTD’s are scanned
every three seconds. RTD linearization, open/short
detection, and lead compensation are performed by the
RTD module. RTD temperature is sent to the MPS-CTU
where temperature monitoring occurs.
7.5 DIFFERENTIAL MODULE (MPS-DIF)
The differential module obtains 32 samples per cycle of
the differential current. A Discrete-Fourier-Transform
(DFT) algorithm is used to obtain the magnitude of the
three differential currents. Frequency of operation is set by
the MPS-CTU unit and allows differential protection to be
used in variable-frequency drive applications. The DFT
values are sent to the MPS-CTU where differential
protection is performed.
7.6 FIRMWARE DIAGNOSTICS
Starting with firmware 2.01, diagnostic error handling
has been added. In the event of an internal fault, a
diagnostic error code is generated and can be viewed with
the OPI. The last error code can be viewed by selecting
Setup System Config Maintenance Firmware Version.
The diagnostic code is a two or three digit hexadecimal
number.
02 to FF:
100:
200:
300:
400:
500:
600:
700:
800:
900:
Processor Fault
Protection-Algorithm Fault
Relay-Control Algorithm Fault
Starter-Control Fault
Menu-Display Fault
OPI-Key-Handler Fault
Real-Time Clock Fault
Communication-Handler Fault
RTD Temperature-Handler Fault
A/D Communication-Interface Fault
The last diagnostic error code is saved in non-volatile
memory. The diagnostic code is overwritten by any new
codes but can also be manually set to zero. To clear the
error code, press RESET while in the Firmware Version
menu.
Theory of Operation
MPS Motor Protection System
Page 7-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
When upgrading an MPS that did not previously support
the diagnostic error code, the initial value of the diagnostic
code is not valid and should be cleared.
A diagnostic error generates a Trip1 and increments the
trip counter; however, a trip record is not generated.
Theory of Operation
MPS Motor Protection System
8. COMMUNICATIONS
8.1 PERSONAL-COMPUTER INTERFACE
8.1.1 FIRMWARE UPGRADE
The MPS-CTU control program is stored in flash
memory. Field updates can be made through the I/O
module communications connection. The following are
required:
A Windows PC with the SE-Flash program installed
A file containing the MPS-CTU control program (.s19
file)
An RS-232/RS-485 converter that operates at 57,600
bit/s. Use the Littelfuse Startco SE-485-PP or
SE-485-DIN.
SE-Flash is available at www.littelfuse.com/
relayscontrols.
8.1.2 SE-COMM-RIS
SE-Comm-RIS is a Windows-based program used to
access MPS functions with a personal computer (PC) via
the RS-485 network interface or Modbus® TCP(1). Use SEComm-MPS to program an MPS either by changing
individual set points or by downloading set-point files.
Existing MPS set points can be transferred to the PC.
Metered values can be viewed simultaneously and the MPS
can
be
controlled
with
the
computer.
SE-Comm-RIS extends the event-record storage capability
of the MPS by allowing the user to transfer data to PC
memory at a programmable interval. Protection curve
plotting capability is included. SE-Comm-RIS is available
at www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols.
(1)
Requires Ethernet option and firmware 2.50 or higher.
8.2 NETWORK INTERFACE
Each MPS-CTU is equipped with an RS-485 interface
and can be optionally equipped with a DeviceNet, Ethernet,
or Profibus interface. Communications interfaces are
mutually exclusive; only one can be used at a time.
For detailed information see Appendices in this manual
and applicable communications manuals.
8.2.1 RS-485 COMMUNICATIONS
SE-485 communications support Modbus® RTU and
Allen Bradley® DF1 half-duplex protocols. All set points
and meter values are accessible. Commands are provided
to perform trips, resets, and starter control.
Modbus® RTU function codes supported:
Read Holding Registers (Code 3)
Read Input Registers (Code 4)
Write Single Register (Code 6)
Write Multiple Registers (Code 16)
Command Instruction (Code 5)
Page 8-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
DF1 Commands Supported
Unprotected Read (CMD = 01)
Unprotected Write (CMD = 08)
Typed Read (CMD = 0F, FNC = 68)
Typed Write (CMD = 0F, FNC = 67)
Typed Logical Read (CMD = 0F, FNC = A2)
Typed Logical Write (CMD = 0F, FNC = AA)
8.2.2 DEVICENET COMMUNICATIONS
DeviceNet™ communications support Explicit
Messaging and Polled I/O. All set points and meter values
are accessible using Explicit Messaging. The Polled I/O
connection supports the following ODVA input
assemblies:
Basic Overload (50)
Extended Overload (51)
Basic Motor Starter (52)
Extended Motor Starter 1 (53)
Extended Motor Starter 2 (53)
In addition to the ODVA assemblies, a userconfigurable fixed block of 64 bytes is available.
The Polled I/O connection supports the following
ODVA Output assemblies:
Basic Overload (2)
Basic Motor Starter (3)
Extended Contactor
Extended Motor Starter
An Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is provided for use
with DeviceNet configuration tools such as RSNetWorx
and DeltaV.
8.2.3 ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS
The MPS supports Modbus® TCP and Ethernet/IP using
the Anybus-S module from HMS Fieldbus Systems AB.
Data from the MPS consists of a 64-byte assembly
representing user-defined register data. A command
structure is provided to write set-point and MPS
commands.
Starting with firmware 2.50, Modbus® TCP provides
access to all MPS registers and supports SE-Comm-RIS.
8.2.4 PROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS
The MPS supports Profibus-DP using the Anybus-S
module. Data from the MPS consists of a 64-byte assembly
representing user-defined register data. A command
structure is provided to write set-point and MPS
commands.
Personal Computer Interface
MPS Motor Protection System
Page 8-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
This page intentionally left blank.
Technical Specifications
Page 9-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
9. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
9.1 CONTROL UNIT (MPS-CTU)
Supply ...................................... 25 VA, 120 to 240 Vac
(+10, -45%),
40 to 400 Hz, power
factor corrected;
25 W, 110 to 250 Vdc
(+10, -25%)
Power-Up Time ........................ 800 ms at 120 Vac
Ride-Through Time .................. 100 ms minimum
24-Vdc Source (1) ...................... 100 mA maximum
AC Measurements:
Methods .............................. True RMS and DFT,
Positive- and negativesequence components of
the fundamental
Sample Rate ........................ 16 samples/cycle
Frequency:
Fixed ................................... 50, 60 Hz
Variable .............................. 10 to 70 Hz, sync via
4-20 mA signal from
ASD
Phase-Current Inputs: (2)
Range .................................. 18 x CT-Primary Rating
(Ip)
Accuracy: (3)
I < Ip ................................. 1% Ip
I > Ip ................................. 1% Reading
Burden ................................ < 0.01
Unbalance Accuracy ........... 0.01 pu
Common-Mode Voltage ..... 120 Vac maximum
Thermal Withstand:
Continuous ....................... 5 x IP
1-Second .......................... 80 x IP
Earth-Leakage Input:
Range .................................. 1.5 x Earth-Fault-CTPrimary Rating (Ie)
Accuracy (3) ......................... 1% Ie
Burden ................................ < 0.01 (1- and 5-A
inputs), 10 for EFCT
Common-Mode Voltage ..... 120 Vac maximum
Thermal Withstand:
Continuous ....................... 5 x Ie
1-Second .......................... 80 x Ie
Phase-Voltage Inputs: (4, 5)
Nominal Input .................... 30 to 600 Vac line-to-line
Input Resistance ................. 3.4 M
Range.................................. 1.4 x PT-Primary Rating
(Vp)
Voltage-Input Fuse ............. 0.3 A, Class CC
Littelfuse KLKR.300
Voltage-Input Wire(9) ......... 18 AWG to 14 AWG
(0.82 to 2.08 mm2), 600 V
(3)
Accuracy:
V < Vp .............................. 1% Vp
V > Vp .............................. 1% Reading
Unbalance Accuracy .......... 0.01 pu
Terminal Torque ................. 0.5 N·m (4.4 lbf·in)
Frequency Metering:
Range.................................. 5 to 100 Hz,
Uses VA input,
Sine wave assumed
Accuracy ............................ 0.05 Hz
PTC-Thermistor Input: (1)
Cold Resistance .................. 1500 maximum at 20C
(68°F)
Trip Level ........................... 2,800 ± 100
Sensor Current .................... 2 mA maximum
4-20 mA Analog Input:
Input Burden....................... 100
Common-Mode
Voltage (6) ........................... ± 5 Vdc
4-20 mA Analog Output: (1)
Load.................................... 500 maximum
Range.................................. 0 to 25 mA
Update Time ...................... 500 ms
Tachometer Input: (7)
Type.................................... Active pickup, 24-V logic
output, sourcing, PNP
output
TURCK Bi1.5-EG08AP6X-V1131 or
equivalent
Pulses Per Revolution......... 1 to 120
Pulse Frequency ................. 10 Hz to 10 kHz
Accuracy ............................ 1%
Timing Accuracies: (8)
Set Points ............................ -10%, + 0%
(minimum 25 to 45 ms)
Overload ............................. Greater of 2% or
+ 200 ms (minimum 25 to
45 ms)
Technical Specifications
Page 9-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
Starter-Control Stop Time:
Digital Input........................ 30 to 80 ms
OPI...................................... 70 to 200 ms
Network .............................. 30 to 80 ms
Relay Contacts (Relays 1 and 2):
Configuration ...................... N.O. (Form A)
CSA/UL Contact Rating ..... 8 A resistive 250 Vac, 5 A
resistive 30 Vdc
Supplemental Contact Ratings:
Break:
dc................................... 200 W resistive,
ac ................................... 3,040 VA resistive,
1,000 VA inductive
(PF = 0.4)
Subject to maximums of 8 Aac and 5 Adc,
250 V (ac or dc).
Relay Contacts (Relays 3 and 4):
Configuration ...................... N.O. and N.C. (Form C)
CSA/UL Contact Rating ..... 8 A resistive 250 Vac,
8 A resistive 30 Vdc
Supplemental Contact Ratings:
Make/Carry ...................... 30 A, 0.2 s
Rating Code ..................... B300
Break:
dc................................... 50 W resistive, 150 Vdc
ac ................................... 2,500 VA resistive,
360 VA inductive
(PF = 0.4)
Subject to maximums of 8 A and 250 V (ac or dc).
Solid-State Output (Relay 5):
Configuration ...................... N.O. (Form A)
Rating ................................. 100 mA, 250 V (ac or dc)
On Resistance ..................... 30 maximum
Bus Length ......................... 1.2 km (4,000’) maximum
Cable .................................. Belden 3124A or
equivalent
Standard Network Communications:
Configuration ..................... RS-485, 2-wire multi-drop
Baud Rate ........................... 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2
kbit/s
Protocols ............................. Modbus RTU and
A-B DF1
Isolation .............................. 120 Vac
Bus Length ......................... 1.2 km (4,000’) maximum
Real-Time Clock and Non-Volatile RAM:
Power-Off Retention .......... 7 Years at 20C (68°F)
Battery Shelf Life ............... > 50 Years at 20C (68°F)
Dimensions:
Height................................... 121 mm (4.8”)
Width.................................... 190 mm (7.5”)
Depth .................................... 127 mm (5.0”)
Shipping Weight ...................... 2.0 kg (4.4 lb)
PWB Conformal Coating ......... MIL-1-46058 qualified
UL QMJU2 recognized
Environment:
Operating Temperature ......... -40 to 60°C (-40 to 140°F)
Storage Temperature ............. -55 to 80°C (-67 to 176°F)
Humidity ............................ 85% Non-Condensing
Surge Withstand ....................... ANSI/IEEE C37.90.11989 (Oscillatory and Fast
Transient)
Certification ............................. CSA, Canada and USA
Digital Inputs: (1)
Range .................................. 24 to 130 V (ac or dc),
5 mA
Guaranteed On .................... 12 Vdc at 3 mA,
20 Vac at 3 mA
Guaranteed Off ................... 3 Vdc at 2 mA,
2.5 Vac at 0.3 mA
IRIG-B:
Format ................................ Amplitude Modulated
IRIG-B122
Amplitude ........................... 1 to 10 Vpp
Impedance........................... 10 k
Ratio ................................... 3:1 to 6:1
I/O Module Interface (OPI, RTD and DIF):
Module Supply (1) ............... 24 Vdc, 400 mA
maximum
Configuration ...................... RS-485, 2-wire multi-drop
UL Recognized(10)
Australia
To:
CSA C22.2 No. 14 Industrial Control Equipment
UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
UL 1053 Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying
Equipment
Australia, Regulatory Compliance Mark (RCM)
Technical Specifications
Page 9-3
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
9.2 OPERATOR INTERFACE (MPS-OPI):
9.3 RTD MODULE (MPS-RTD)
Supply(1) ................................... 24 Vdc Nominal (20 to 30
Vdc), 80 mA
Supply(1) ................................... 16 to 32 Vdc, 90 mA
Configuration ........................... 8 inputs, 3-wire RTD
Display Type ............................ 4 x 20 Alphanumeric
Vacuum Fluorescent
Interconnection Cable:
Type .................................... Belden 3124A or
equivalent
Maximum Length ............... 1.2 km (4,000’)
Supplied length ................... 4 m (13’)
Dimensions:
Height.....................................98 mm (3.9”)
Width .....................................192 mm (7.6”)
Depth ......................................113 mm (4.5”)
Shipping Weight ....................... 0.6 kg (1.3 lb)
PWB Conformal Coating ......... MIL-1-46058 qualified
UL QMJU2 recognized
Environment:
Operating Temperature ....... -40 to 60C (-40 to 140°F)
Storage Temperature........... -55 to 80C (-67 to 160°F)
Humidity ............................. 85% Non-Condensing
RTD Types ............................... Pt100, Ni100, Ni120,
Cu10
Measurement Range................. -40 to 200°C (-40 to
392°F), with open and
short detection
Sensor Current ......................... 2 mA
Lead Compensation.................. 20 maximum
Accuracy:
Pt100, Ni100, Ni120 RTD .... 1C
Cu10 RTD .......................... 3C
Interconnection Cable:
Type.................................... Belden 3124A or
equivalent
Maximum Length ............... 1.2 km (4,000’)
Supplied length ................... 4 m (13’)
Surge Withstand ....................... ANSI/IEEE C37.90.11989 (Oscillatory and Fast
Transient)
Dimensions:
Height .................................... 87 mm (3.4”)
Width ..................................... 113 mm (4.4”)
Depth ..................................... 53 mm (2.1”)
Certification.............................. CSA, Canada and USA
Shipping Weight ...................... 0.4 kg (0.9 lb)
UL Recognized(10)
Australia
Hazardous-Location............ Class I Zone 2 Ex nA II
T6
Class I, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C, D
To:
CSA C22.2 No. 14 Industrial Control Equipment
CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987 – Non-Incendive
Electrical Equipment for use in Class I,
Division 2 Hazardous Locations
UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
UL 1053 Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying
Equipment
Australia, Regulatory Compliance Mark (RCM)
PWB Conformal Coating ......... MIL-1-46058 qualified
UL QMJU2 recognized
Environment:
Operating Temperature....... 40 to 60C
(-40 to 140°F)
Storage Temperature .......... 55 to 80C
(-67 to 160°F)
Humidity ............................ 85% Non-Condensing
Surge Withstand ....................... ANSI/IEEE C37.90.11989 (Oscillatory and Fast
Transient)
Technical Specifications
Page 9-4
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
Certification.............................. CSA, Canada and USA
UL Recognized(10)
Australia
Hazardous-Location ........... Class I Zone 2 Ex nA II
T6
Class I, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C, D
To:
CSA C22.2 No. 14 Industrial Control Equipment
UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
CSA E60079-15: 02 Electrical Apparatus for
Explosive Gas Atmospheres
CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987 – Non-Incendive
Electrical Equipment for use in Class I,
Division 2 Hazardous Locations
UL 60079-15 Electrical Apparatus for Explosive
Gas Atmospheres
Australia, Regulatory Compliance Mark (RCM)
9.4 DIFFERENTIAL MODULE (MPS-DIF)
Supply(1) ................................... 16 to 32 Vdc, 90 mA
CT Inputs:
Thermal Withstand:
Continuous ....................... 5 x CT Primary Rating
(Id)
1-Second .......................... 80 x Id
Burden................................. 0.01
Terminal-Block Ratings:
CT Inputs ............................ 25 A, 500 Vac
10 AWG (4.0 mm2)
Differential-Current Measurement:
Metering Range .................. 15 x Id
Protection Range................. 80 x Id
Metering Accuracy:
I < Id ................................. 2% Id
I > Id ................................. 2% Reading
Timing Accuracy ................ 5%, minimum trip time,
Range is set point +20 ms
to set point +150 ms,
median 81 ms
Interconnection Cable:
Type.................................... Belden® 3124A or
equivalent
Maximum Length ............... 1.2 km (4,000’)
Supplied length ................... 4 m (13’)
Dimensions:
Height .................................... 87 mm (3.4”)
Width ..................................... 113 mm (4.4”)
Depth ..................................... 53 mm (2.1”)
Shipping Weight ...................... 0.4 kg (0.9 lb)
PWB Conformal Coating ......... MIL-1-46058 qualified
UL-QMJU2 recognized
Environment:
Operating Temperature ......... -40 to 60°C (-40 to 140°F)
Storage Temperature ............. -55 to 80°C (-67 to 176°F)
Humidity............................. 85% Non-Condensing
Surge Withstand ....................... ANSI/IEEE C37.90.11989 (Oscillatory and Fast
Transient)
NOTES:
(1)
The I/O module supply (terminal 56), PTC (terminal
54), AN OUT (terminal 40), and 24-Vdc source
(terminal 42) are referenced to the same common.
(2)
Current Threshold (%) is defined in Section 3.2.1.2.
Power readings are not displayed for currents below
this threshold. To maintain specified accuracy, phase
CT's should be selected with a primary rating between
100 and 300% of motor full-load current.
(3)
Transformer accuracy not included.
(4)
Voltage unbalance is not displayed for positivesequence voltage levels below 20% of system voltage
setting.
(5)
Direct connection for system-voltages up to 600 Vac
line-to-line. UL certification requires the voltage-input
fault current to be limited to 5 kA. Use Class CC fuses,
3/10 A, Littelfuse KLKR.300. A self-adhesive label
stating this limitation is provided.
(6)
Common-mode voltage relative to CTU terminal 3.
(7)
Referenced to COM.
(8)
Also see Tables 5.1 and 5.2.
(9)
When direct connection is used.
(10)
A 600Y/347 or 480Y/277 system is required when the
MPS direct-voltage connection is used.
Technical Specifications
MPS Motor Protection System
Page 9-5
Rev. 6-E-030116
10. WARRANTY
The MPS Motor Protection System is warranted to be
free from defects in material and workmanship for a period
ten years from the date of purchase.
Littelfuse Startco will (at Littelfuse Startco’s option)
repair, replace, or refund the original purchase price of an
MPS-CTU, MPS-OPI, MPS-RTD, or MPS-DIF that is
determined by Littelfuse Startco to be defective if it is
returned to the Littelfuse Startco factory, freight prepaid,
within the warranty period. This warranty does not apply
to repairs required as a result of misuse, negligence, an
accident, improper installation, tampering or insufficient
care. Littelfuse Startco does not warrant products repaired
or modified by non-Littelfuse Startco personnel.
Technical Specifications
MPS Motor Protection System
Page 9-6
Rev. 6-E-030116
This page intentionally left blank.
Technical Specifications
Page A-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
APPENDIX A
MPS-OPI MENU MAP
MAIN MENU
METERING
(METERING Continued)
CURRENT
FREQUENCY
Ia
Ib
Ic
Frequency: Hz
UNBALANCE (I)
RTD MODULE TEMPERATURE
Summary (Max/Min)
+ Sequence
- Sequence
Stator
Bearing
Load
Unbalance
EARTH LEAKAGE
RTD Module 1 to 3
RTD #1 to 8
Ig
RTD Identification
THERMAL CAPACITY
Function
Temp./Messages
2
Used I t
Trend I2t
Reset Time
Trip Time
Inhibit Time
Starts Available
VOLTAGE
Vab
Vbc
Vca
I/O STATUS
Analog Input
Digital Input State
Output Relay States
SYSTEM STATUS
Starter State
(Stop/Run/Start)
Motor State
(Stop/Run/Start)
UNBALANCE (V)
Reduced OC
(On/Off)
+ Sequence
- Sequence
Motor Speed
Unbalance
DIFFERENTIAL (A)
Ia
Ib
Ic
POWER
Real (P)
Apparent (S)
Reactive (Q)
Power Factor
ENERGY
Kilowatt-hours
Kilovolt-ampere-hours
Kilovar-hours
(METERING Continued)
COMM STATE
Notes:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
List indicates possible trips and alarms.
Password required.
Lists do not match MPS-OPI menu
order.
Password is required and the set point is
locked when the motor is running.
Legend:
[x]
Enter numeric
[s]
Enter string
[E/D] Enable/Disable
[TA] Trip Action: Disable; Trip1; Trip2; Trip3
[AA] Alarm Action: Disable; Alarm1;
Alarm2; Alarm3
[EA] Ethernet address
Appendix A, MPS-OPI Menu Map
Page A-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MESSAGES
TRIP AND ALARM(1)
Overcurrent Trip
Aux. Overcurrent Trip
Reduced Overcurrent Trip
Overload Trip/Alarm
Earth-Fault Trip/Alarm
Differential Trip/Alarm
I Unbalance Trip/Alarm
V Unbalance Trip/Alarm
Jam Trip/Alarm
Undercurrent Trip/Alarm
Overvoltage Trip/Alarm
Undervoltage Trip/Alarm
Analog High Trip/Alarm
Analog Low Trip/Alarm
PTC Trip/Alarm
Phase Loss Trip (I and V)
Phase Reverse (I and V)
Underspeed Trip
Relay Status Trip
Digital Input 1 to 7 Trip
RTD M1 to 3 #1-8 Trip1
RTD M1 to 3 #1-8 Alarm1
RTD M1 to 3 Comm. Trip
RTD M1 to 3 Comm. Alarm
RTD Sensor Trip/Alarm
Start Time Trip
Display Comm. Trip
I2t Inhibit Alarm
NV RAM Error
A/D Status Error
Trip Caused by STOP
Comm Trip/Alarm
Power Factor Trip/Alarm
Underpower Trip/Alarm
Reversepower Trip/Alarm
Starts/Hour Trip/Alarm
I2t Time to Reset
(MESSAGES Continued)
EVENT RECORDS
Record Numbers
0 to 63
Date/Time
Source: Start/Trip/ETR
Trip: Trip Source
Currents: Ia, Ib, Ic, 3I0
Voltage: Vab, Vbc, Vca
Differential: Ia, Ib, Ic
Analog In
Voltage Unbalance
Current Unbalance
Start Time
Used I2t %
RTD Temperatures
STATISTICS
Trip Counters
Overcurrent
Aux. Overcurrent
Overload
Earth Fault
I Unbalance
V Unbalance
Jam
Undercurrent
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Analog High
Analog Low
Phase Loss (I and V)
Phase Reverse (I andV)
Underspeed
Contactor Status
RTD M1 #1 to # 8
RTD M2 #1 to # 8
RTD M3 #1 to # 8
NV RAM
PTC Temperature
RTD Module Comm
RTD Sensor
Starter Sequence
OPI
Stop
Comm
PF Motoring
Underfrequency
Overfrequency
Reduced Overcurrent
Differential
Diagnostic
Underpower
Reversepower
STATUS MESSAGES
INx Stop Open
INx Interlock Open
INx Limit1 Open
INx Limit2 Open
I2t Start Inhibit
tº Disabled by ETR
Backspin Timer On
Digital Inputs 1 to 7
Running Hours
Hours
EMERG I2t RESET
Reset I2t Memory (2)
Re-enable Temp.
(MESSAGES Continued)
RE-START TRACE
Appendix A, MPS-OPI Menu Map
Page A-3
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
SETUP
PROTECTION
(SETUP Continued)
(PROTECTION Continued)
(3)
Phase Loss (I and V)
Overload
Phase Reverse (I and V)
Trip Action (2)
Model Type (2)
[TA]
Trip Action (2)
Alarm Action (2)
NEMA Model
K-Factor Model
K-Factor (2)
LR Current (2)
LR Time Cold (2)
LR Time Hot (2)
Cooling Factor (2)
I2t Start Inhibit (2)
I2t Inhibit Level (2)
I2t Alarm Action (2)
I2t Alarm Level (2)
I2t Reset Type (2)
Normal
Auto
Trip and Alarm Delay (2)
[x]
[x]
[x]
[x]
[x]
[E/D]
[x]
[AA]
[x]
Overcurrent
Aux. Overcurrent
Trip Action (2)
Trip Level (2)
Trip Delay (2)
[TA]
[x]
[x]
Reduced Overcurrent
Trip Action (2)
Trip Level (2)
[TA]
[x]
Alarm Action (2)
Alarm Level (2)
Alarm Delay (2)
(SETUP Continued above)
[TA]
[AA]
Starts/Hour
[TA]
[AA]
Trip Action (2)
Alarm Action (2)
Numbers of Starts/Hour (2)
1 to 10
[x]
RTD Temperature
RTD Modules 1 to 3
RTD #1 to #8
Name (2)
Type (2)
[s]
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Ni120
Cu10
Function (2)
Stator
Bearing
Load
Ambient
Earth Fault
Jam
Unbalance (I)
Unbalance (V)
Undercurrent
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Underpower
Reversepower
PF Quadrant 3
PF Quadrant 4
Underfrequency
Differential
Trip Action (2)
Trip Level (2)
Trip Delay (2)
PTC Temperature
Trip Action (2)
Alarm Action (2)
Time Between (2)
Multiple Motor Sequence
[TA]
[AA]
[x]
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
[x]
[x]
Trip Temp. (2)
Alarm Temp. (2)
RTD Sensor Trip Action (2)
RTD Sensor Alarm Action (2)
[TA]
[x]
[x]
[AA]
[x]
[x]
Temp. Trip Action (2)
Temp. Alarm Action(2)
HMC Enable/Disable (2)
HMC Maximum Bias (2)
HMC Minimum Bias (2)
Underspeed
Trip Action (2)
Speeds 1 to 3 (2)
Times 1 to 3 (2)
[TA]
[AA]
[TA]
[AA]
[E/D]
[x]
[x]
[TA]
[AA]
[x]
(SETUP Continued on next page)
Appendix A, MPS-OPI Menu Map
Page A-4
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
(SETUP Continued)
(SETUP Continued)
SYSTEM RATINGS
STARTER
[x]
PH-CT Primary (4)
[x]
EF-CT Primary (4)
[x]
DF-CT Primary (4)
[x]
System Voltage (4)
[x]
Input Voltage (4)
V Connection (4)
No V Connection
1 PT line-line
2 PT line-line
3 PT l-n/Direct
FLA Rating (4)
Frequency (4)
50 Hz
60 Hz
[x]
Sync. Speed (4)
Service Factor (2)
FLA Rating 2 (4)
Run-Mode Delay (2)
[x]
[x]
[x]
[x]
Starter Type (4)
Protection Only
FullVoltage Non-Reversing
Adj. Speed Drive
Soft Start
Full Voltage Reversing
Two Speed
Reactor/Resistor
Closed Transition
Reactor/Resistor
Open Transition
Slip Ring
Soft Starter with Bypass
Part Winding
Double Delta
Autotransformer
Cloased Transition
Two Winding
Wye Delta
Open Transition
Wye Delta
Closed Transition
[x]
Start Time (4)
[x]
Stage1 Delay (4)
[x]
Stage2 Delay (4)
[x]
Stage3 Delay (4)
Transfers
Transfer Type
Transfer Time
Current Transfer
Transfer Level
[x]
Backspin
Backspin Enable/Disable
Backspin Delay
(SETUP Continued above)
(4)
(4)
[E/D]
[x]
Remote Group
Digital Starts
Network Starts
OPI Starts
[E/D]
[E/D]
[E/D]
Local Group
OPI Starts
[E/D]
(SETUP Continued on next page)
Appendix A, MPS-OPI Menu Map
Page A-5
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
(SETUP Continued)
DIGITAL INPUTS
(SETUP Continued)
Digital Inputs 1 to 7
Function (4)
ANALOG INPUT
None
Start1
Start2
Stop
Relay (A,B,C,D) Status
Interlock
Trip1 (with Delay)
Reset
Local Select
Local Start1
Local Start2
2-Wire Start1
2-Wire Start2
FLA2 Select
Limit1 Stop
Limit2 Stop
Reduced OC
[E/D]
[x]
[x]
Start Bypass (2)
Bypass Delay (2)
Trip Delay (2)
Tachometer (2)
[E/D]
[x]
Enable/Disable
Pulses Per Rev.
RELAY OUTPUTS
Relays 1 to 5
Function (4)
Starter Relay
(A,B,C,D)
Trip1
Trip1 Pulse
Trip2
Trip3
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
I2t Start
Inhibit
Watchdog
Reduced OC
None
Mode (4)
Fail Safe
Non Fail Safe
RY Pulse Time (2)
(SETUP Continued above)
Local
Interlock
Current Detected
Run Mode
Sequence
Complete
4-20 Input Type (2)
Metering Only
Protection
Sync to ASD
Motor Speed
Protection
High Level Trip (2)
Low Level Trip (2)
Trip Delay (2)
High Level Alarm (2)
Low Level Alarm (2)
Alarm Delay (2)
[x]
[x]
[x]
[x]
[x]
[x]
Sync to ASD
4 mA Frequency (2)
20 mA Frequency (2)
[x]
[x]
Motor Speed
4 mA % Speed (2)
20 mA % Speed (2)
[x]
[x]
ANALOG OUTPUT
Output Parameter (2)
Phase Current
Earth Leakage
Thermal Capacity
Stator RTD
Bearing RTD
Load RTD
Ambient RTD
Voltage
Unbalance (I)
Power Factor
Real Power
Reactive Power
Apparent Power
Zero
Full Scale
Speed
Zero Calibrate (2)
Full Scale Calibrate (2)
[x]
[x]
[x]
(SETUP Continued on next page)
Appendix A, MPS-OPI Menu Map
Page A-6
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
(SETUP Continued)
(SETUP Continued)
HARDWARE
OPI Display
[TA]
OPI-Loss Trip Action (2)
(2)
Number of OPI’s
One/Two/Three
(Network Comms. Continued)
Ethernet IP (2)
Ethernet Mask (2)
Network-Error Trip Action (2)
Intensity (2)
Network-Error Alarm Action (2)
25/50/75/100%
Screen Saver (2)
Meter Summary
Default Display
OPI Control Select (2)
Remote Select
OPI Select
Local Select
[E/D]
RTD-Module-Error Alarm Action(2)
DIF Modules
Enable/Disable (2)
DIF-Module-ErrorTrip Action(2)
DIF-Module-Error Alarm Action(2)
Net Write Access
DeviceNet Produce
Instance: None/0x32/0x33/
0x34/0x35/0x36/0x64/
0x65/0x66/0x67
[E/D]
[E/D]
[E/D]
RTD Modules
Total Modules (2)
None/One/Two/Three
RTD-Module-ErrorTrip Action(2)
[EA]
[EA]
[TA]
[AA]
[TA]
[AA]
[E/D]
[TA]
[AA]
DeviceNet Consume
Instance: None/0x02/0x03/
0x04/0x05
User Registers (2)
Registers 0-31 (2)
[x]
SYSTEM CONFIG.
[s]
[s]
System Name (2)
Password (2)
Clock Settings
RTC Date/Time (2)
IRIG Offset (h) (2)
IRIG Offset (min) (2)
Password Time Out (2)
[x]
Ip Threshold
[x]
Trace Auto-Start
[E/D]
[x]
[x]
[x]
Network Comms.
Network Type (2)
None
A-B DF1
Modbus RTU
Modbus/TCP
Anybus
(Profibus or Ethernet IP)
DeviceNet
Network ID (2)
Baud Rate (2)
1.2/2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2kbit/s
DN125k/DN250k/DN500k
Error Check (2)
Not Selected
CRC Check
BCC Check
(SETUP Continued above)
Maintenance
Clear Event Records (2,4)
Clear Energy Values (2,4)
Clear Trip Records (2,4)
Clear Run Hours (2,4)
Load Defaults (2,4)
Unlock Local (2,4)
Restart MPS-CTU (2,4)
Firmware Version,
Diagnostic Error
[Y/N]
[Y/N]
[Y/N]
[Y/N]
[Y/N]
[Y/N]
[Y/N]
Serial Number
Appendix A, MPS-OPI Menu Map
Page B-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
APPENDIX B
MPS SET-UP RECORD
Motor:______________________________ MPS S/N: __________________________ Date: ______________________
Firmware Revision:___________________________
PART I: SYSTEM AND MOTOR PARAMETERS
PARAMETER AND SETTINGS
System Ratings
PH-CT Primary (Ip)
EF-CT Primary (Ie)
DF-CT Primary (Id)
System Voltage
Input Voltage
MIN
DEFAULT
MAX
UNIT
1
1
1
0.12
0.06
100.00
5.00
100.00
0.60
0.12
5,000
5,000
5,000
25
0.6
A
A
A
kV
kV
Input Voltage Connection
Full-Load Current
Frequency
Synchronous Speed
Service Factor
FLA Rating 2
Run-Mode Delay
Digital Inputs
Input 1: Function
Start Bypass
Bypass Delay
Trip Delay
Input 2: Function
Start Bypass
Bypass Delay
Trip Delay
Input 3: Function
Start Bypass
Bypass Delay
Trip Delay
Input 4: Function
Start Bypass
Bypass Delay
Trip Delay
Input 5: Function
Start Bypass
Bypass Delay
Trip Delay
Input 6: Function
Start Bypass
Bypass Delay
Trip Delay
Input 7: Function
Start Bypass
Bypass Delay
Trip Delay
None
100.00
5,000
A
60
Hz
10
1,800.00
10k
rpm
1
1.00
1.25
pu
1
100.00
5,000
A
5
10.00
120
s
See Table 4.2 Input Function Definition
Not Used
Disable
0.5
5.00
100
s
0.01
0.10
100
s
Not Used
Disable
0.5
5.00
100
s
0.01
0.10
100
s
Not Used
Disable
0.5
5.00
100
s
0.01
0.10
100
s
Not Used
Disable
0.5
5.00
100
s
0.01
0.10
100
s
Not Used
Disable
0.5
5.00
100
s
0.01
0.10
100
s
Not Used
Disable
0.5
5.00
100
s
0.01
0.10
100
s
Not Used
Disable
0.5
5.00
100
s
0.01
0.10
100
s
PROGRAM SELECTION
None
1PT
2PT
3PT/Direct
50
60
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
1
Appendix B, MPS Set-Up Record
Page B-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
PARAMETER AND SETTINGS
Tachometer
Pulses per Revolution
Relay Outputs
Relay 1: Function
Mode
Relay 2: Function
Mode
Relay 3: Function
Mode
Relay 4: Function
Mode
Relay 5: Function
Mode
RY Pulse Time
Analog Input
MIN
DEFAULT MAX
UNIT
Disable
1
60.00
100
See Table 4.1 Output Function Definition
None
Fail-Safe
None
Fail-Safe
None
Fail-Safe
None
Fail-Safe
None
Fail-Safe
0.05
0.25
10
s
Metering
Only
4-20 Input Type
Protection:
High-Level Trip
Low-Level Trip
Trip Delay
High-Level Alarm
Low-Level Alarm
Alarm Delay
Sync to ASD Set Points:
4-mA Frequency
20-mA Frequency
Motor Speed Set Points:
4-mA Percent Speed
20-mA Percent Speed
Analog Output
Output Parameter
Zero Calibrate
Full-Scale Calibrate
OPI Display
OPI-Loss Trip
Number of OPI’s
Intensity
Screen Saver
OPI Control Select
Remote Select
OPI Select
Local Select
RTD Modules
Total Modules
RTD-Module-Error Trip Action
0.1
0.1
0.01
0.1
0.1
0.01
16.00
7.00
5.00
14.00
9.00
1.00
20
20
100
20
20
100
mA
mA
s
mA
mA
s
0
0
10.00
60.00
70
70
Hz
Hz
0
0
10.00
100.00
100
100
%
%
Phase
Current
Factory Calibrated
Factory Calibrated
PROGRAM SELECTION
Enable
Disable
Fail-Safe
Non-Fail-Safe
Fail-Safe
Non-Fail-Safe
Fail-Safe
Non-Fail-Safe
Fail-Safe
Non-Fail-Safe
Fail-Safe
Non-Fail-Safe
Metering Only
Protection
Sync. to ASD
Motor Speed
See Table 4.3 Analog Output Parameter
Definition
Trip1
Trip3
3
Enable
Disable
Trip2
1
2
25
50
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
0
1
Disable
Trip2
2
3
Trip1
Trip3
Trip1
1
100
0
Disable
%
75
100
Disable
Appendix B, MPS Set-Up Record
Page B-3
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
PARAMETER AND SETTINGS
RTD-Module-Error Alarm
Action
MIN
Trip1
Temperature Alarm Action
Alarm1
DIF Module
Enable/Disable
Disable
DIF-Module-Error Trip Action
Disable
DIF-Module-Error Alarm
Action
Network Communications
Disable
Network Type
Baud Rate
Error Checking
Ethernet IP
Ethernet Mask
MAX
Disable
Temperature Trip Action
Network ID
DEFAULT
Modbus
0
254
SCI 9600
Not
Selected
192.168.
000.001
255.255.
255.000
Default Gateway
0.0.0.0
Network-Error Trip Action
Disable
Network-Error Alarm Action
Disable
DeviceNet Producing Assembly
0x36
DeviceNet Consuming Assembly
None
UNIT
PROGRAM SELECTION
Disable
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Disable
Trip1
Trip2
Trip3
Disable
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Enable
Disable
Trip2
Disable
Trip2
Disable
Trip1
Trip3
Trip1
Trip3
None
Allen-Bradley
Modbus
DeviceNet
Anybus
Modbus TCP
SCI 1200
SCI 2400
SCI 4800
SCI 9600
SCI 19200(1)
Not Selected
CRC
DN125
DN250
DN500
Disable
Trip2
Disable
Alarm2
None
0x33
0x35
0x64
0x66
None
0x03
0x05
Trip1
Trip3
Alarm1
Alarm3
0x32
0x34
0x36
0x65
0x67
0x02
0x04
255
BCC
Startco MPS
System Name
1111
Change Password
1
10.00
60
min.
Password Timeout
Ip Threshold
0.10
0.10
0.50
x Ip
(IP is Phase-CT-Primary Rating)
Firmware Revision
See Protection System Config Maintenance | Firmware Version
Disable
Enable
Disable
Trace Auto-Start
(1)
Error rate is 1 byte/120 kB. For high reliability, use SCI9600.
Appendix B, MPS Set-Up Record
Page B-4
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
PART II: STARTER PARAMETERS
SET POINT
Starter Type (see Table 6.2)
Start Time
Stage 1 Delay
Stage 2 Delay
Stage 3 Delay
Backspin Timer
Backspin Delay
Remote Group
Digital Inputs
Network
OPI
Transfer
Type
Level
MIN
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
DEFAULT MAX
Protection Only
20.00
500
20.00
500
20.00
500
20.00
500
Disable
5.00
3,600
UNIT
s
s
s
s
Time
1.25
3.0
Enable
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Time
Current
s
Enable
Enable
Enable
1.0
PROGRAM SELECTION
x FLA
PART III: PROTECTION SET POINTS
FUNCTION & SET POINT
Overload
MIN
Trip Action
Model Type
K-Factor
Locked-Rotor Current
Locked-Rotor Time Cold
Locked-Rotor Time Hot
Cooling Factor
I2t Start Inhibit
I2t Inhibit Level
(Per Unit Based on 100% I2t)
MAX
UNIT
Trip1
1
1.5
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
I2t Alarm Action
I2t Overload Alarm Level
DEFAULT
NEMA
6.00
6.00
10.00
5.00
2.00
Disable
10
10
100
100
10
0.30
.90
Reset Type
1.00
1
Disable
Trip2
NEMA
Trip1
Trip3
K-Factor
Enable
Disable
Disable
Alarm2
Alarm1
Alarm3
x FLA
s
s
pu
Alarm1
0.50
PROGRAM SELECTION
pu
Normal
Auto
Multiple Motor Sequence
Normal
Overcurrent
Trip Action
Trip Level
(Ip is Phase-CT-Primary Rating)
Trip Delay
Auxiliary Overcurrent
Trip1
1
10.00
15
x Ip
0
0.05
10
s
Trip Action
Trip Level
(Ip is Phase-CT-Primary Rating)
Trip Delay
Disable
1
10.00
15
x Ip
0
0.05
10
s
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Appendix B, MPS Set-Up Record
Page B-5
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
FUNCTION & SET POINT
Reduced Overcurrent
MIN
Trip Action
Trip Level
(Ip is Phase-CT-Primary Rating)
Earth Fault
1
x Ie
0
0.25
100
s
Alarm1
0.05
0.20
1
x Ie
0
1.00
100
s
Trip1
1
1
1
1
10
100
0.25
1
pu
1
15.00
100
s
Alarm1
0.05
1
0.10
10.00
1
100
5.00
100
Alarm1
2.00
100
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Alarm2
Alarm1
Alarm3
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Alarm2
Alarm1
Alarm3
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Alarm2
Alarm1
Alarm3
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Trip2
Disable
Alarm2
Trip1
Trip3
Alarm1
Alarm3
s
Disable
1
Disable
Trip2
pu
s
Trip1
1
Trip1
Trip3
x FLA
s
0.05
Alarm Action
Trip and Alarm Delay
3.00
5.00
Disable
Trip2
x FLA
s
Trip1
Trip Action
Phase Loss Delay
Phase Reverse (I)
Trip Action
10
100
Alarm1
Alarm Action
Alarm Level
Alarm Delay
Phase Loss (I)
6.00
5.00
PROGRAM SELECTION
x Ip
1
Trip Action
Trip Level
(Per Unit Based on I2/I1)
Trip Delay
15
0.40
Alarm Action
Alarm Level
Alarm Delay
Unbalance (I)
2.00
0.05
Trip Action
Trip Level
Trip Delay
UNIT
Trip1
Alarm Action
Alarm Level
(Ie is EF-CT-Primary Rating)
Alarm Delay
Jam
MAX
Trip1
Trip Action
Trip Level
(Ie is EF-CT-Primary Rating)
Trip Delay
DEFAULT
s
Appendix B, MPS Set-Up Record
Page B-6
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
FUNCTION & SET POINT
Unbalance (V)
MIN
Trip Action
Trip Level
(Per Unit Based on V2/V1)
Trip Delay
0.10
1
pu
1
15.00
100
s
Alarm1
0.05
1
0.05
10.00
1
5.00
Disable
Alarm Action
Alarm1
1
Trip Action
Trip Level
Trip Delay
0.1
1
0.1
1
0.80
20.00
1
100
x Id
0
0.10
10
s
Disable
0.1
0.50
15
x Id
0
0.10
10
s
Disable
0.80
5.00
1
500
0.90
5.00
1
500
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Trip2
Disable
Alarm2
Trip1
Trip3
Alarm1
Alarm3
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Alarm2
Alarm1
Alarm3
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Alarm2
Alarm1
Alarm3
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Alarm2
Alarm1
Alarm3
s
Disable
0.5
0.1
Alarm1
Alarm3
x FLA
s
15
0.5
0.1
Disable
Alarm2
x FLA
s
1.00
Alarm Action
Alarm Level
Alarm Delay
1
100
0.1
Trip Action
Trip Level
Trip Delay
0.50
10.00
Trip1
Trip3
s
Disable
Alarm Action
Alarm Level
(Id is DF-CT-Primary Current)
Alarm Delay
PF Quadrant 4
100
Disable
Trip2
s
Disable
Trip Action
Trip Level
(Id is DF-CT-Primary Current)
Trip Delay
2.00
100
PROGRAM SELECTION
pu
s
Disable
Alarm Action
Alarm Level
Alarm Delay
Differential
1
100
Disable
Trip Action
Phase Reverse
Trip and Alarm Delay
Undercurrent
UNIT
0.05
Trip Action
Phase Loss Delay
Phase Reverse (V)
MAX
Trip1
Alarm Action
Alarm Level
Alarm Delay
Phase Loss (V)
DEFAULT
s
Appendix B, MPS Set-Up Record
Page B-7
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
FUNCTION & SET POINT
PF Quadrant 3
MIN
Trip Action
Trip Level
Trip Delay
0.5
0.1
0.5
0.1
0.5
5.00
500
s
Disable
0.1
0.80
1
pu
0.5
1.00
500
s
Disable
0.1
0.20
1
pu
0.5
5.00
500
s
Disable
0.1
0.20
1
pu
0.5
1.00
500
s
Disable
30
0.5
30
0.5
48
1
80
500
30
0.5
65
5
80
500
62
1
80
500
Disable
Alarm2
Alarm1
Alarm3
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Alarm2
Alarm1
Alarm3
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Alarm2
Alarm1
Alarm3
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Alarm2
Alarm1
Alarm3
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Alarm2
Alarm1
Alarm3
Hz
s
Hz
s
Disable
30
0.5
Trip1
Trip3
Hz
s
Disable
Alarm Action
Alarm Level
Alarm Delay
80
500
Disable
Trip Action
Trip Level
Trip Delay
45
5
Disable
Trip2
s
pu
Alarm Action
Alarm Level
Alarm Delay
Overfrequency
1
500
1
Trip Action
Trip Level
Trip Delay
0.90
5.00
PROGRAM SELECTION
s
0.80
Alarm Action
Alarm Level
(Per Unit of Rated Power)
Alarm Delay
Underfrequency
1
500
0.1
Trip Action
Trip Level
(Per Unit of Rated Power)
Trip Delay
0.80
5.00
Disable
Alarm Action
Alarm Level
(Per Unit of Rated Power)
Alarm Delay
Reversepower
UNIT
Disable
Trip Action
Trip Level
(Per Unit of Rated Power)
Trip Delay
MAX
Disable
Alarm Action
Alarm Level
Alarm Delay
Underpower
DEFAULT
Hz
s
Appendix B, MPS Set-Up Record
Page B-8
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
FUNCTION & SET POINT
PTC Temperature
MIN
DEFAULT
Trip Action
Disable
Alarm Action
Disable
Alarm1
40
40
Trip Action
Speed 1 (Percent Sync Speed)
Time 1
Speed 2
Time 2
Speed 3
Time 3
Overvoltage
1
1
1
1
1
1
100
1,000
100
1,000
100
1,000
1.4
x Vp
1
5.00
500
s
Alarm1
1
1.10
1.4
x Vp
1
5.00
500
s
Disable
0.5
0.70
1
x Vp
1
5.00
500
s
Disable
0.5
0.80
1
x Vp
1
5.00
500
s
Trip Action
Disable
Alarm Action
Number of Starts/Hour
Time Between Starts
1
0
5
0.00
10
500
Disable
Trip2
Disable
Alarm2
Disable
Trip2
Disable
Alarm2
Enable
Trip1
Trip3
Alarm1
Alarm3
Trip1
Trip3
Alarm1
Alarm3
Disable
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Alarm2
Alarm1
Alarm3
Disable
Trip2
Trip1
Trip3
Disable
Alarm2
Alarm1
Alarm3
Disable
Trip2
Disable
Alarm2
Trip1
Trip3
Alarm1
Alarm3
% SS
s
% SS
s
% SS
s
1.20
Alarm Action
Alarm Level
(Vp is system voltage)
Alarm Delay
Starts/Hour
30.00
5.00
60.00
10.00
90.00
15.00
PROGRAM SELECTION
C
C
1
Trip Action
Trip Level
(Vp is system voltage)
Trip Delay
200
200
Trip1
Alarm Action
Alarm Level
(Vp is system voltage)
Alarm Delay
Undervoltage
Disable
150.00
40.00
Disable
Trip Action
Trip Level
(Vp is system voltage)
Trip Delay
UNIT
Disable
RTD-Sensor-Error Trip Action
RTD-Sensor-Error Alarm
Action
Hot-Motor Compensation (HMC)
HMC High
HMC Low
Acceleration Failure—
Underspeed
MAX
min
Appendix B, MPS Set-Up Record
Page B-9
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
FUNCTION & SET POINT
RTD TEMPERATURE
Requires RTD Module(s)
RTD M1 #1:
Name
MIN
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
Disable
Function
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
RTD Module 1 #3
Type
Disable
Function
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
RTD Module 1 #4
Type
Disable
Function
Trip
Alarm
PROGRAM SELECTION
RTD Module 1 #2
Type
Trip
Alarm
RTD M1 #4:
Name
UNIT
Disable
Function
Trip
Alarm
RTD M1 #3:
Name
MAX
RTD Module 1 #1
Type
Trip
Alarm
RTD M1 #2:
Name
DEFAULT
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
Appendix B, MPS Set-Up Record
Page B-10
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
FUNCTION & SET POINT
RTD M1 #5:
Name
MIN
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
Disable
Function
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
RTD Module 1 #7
Type
Disable
Function
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
RTD Module 1 #8
Type
Disable
Function
Trip
Alarm
PROGRAM SELECTION
RTD Module 1 #6
Type
Trip
Alarm
RTD M1 #8:
Name
UNIT
Disable
Function
Trip
Alarm
RTD M1 #7:
Name
MAX
RTD Module 1 #5
Type
Trip
Alarm
RTD M1 #6:
Name
DEFAULT
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
Appendix B, MPS Set-Up Record
Page B-11
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
FUNCTION & SET POINT
RTD M2 #1:
Name
MIN
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
Disable
Function
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
RTD Module 2 #3
Type
Disable
Function
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
RTD Module 2 #4
Type
Disable
Function
Trip
Alarm
PROGRAM SELECTION
RTD Module 2 #2
Type
Trip
Alarm
RTD M2 #4:
Name
UNIT
Disable
Function
Trip
Alarm
RTD M2 #3:
Name
MAX
RTD Module 2 #1
Type
Trip
Alarm
RTD M2 #2:
Name
DEFAULT
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
Appendix B, MPS Set-Up Record
Page B-12
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
FUNCTION & SET POINT
RTD M2 #5:
Name
MIN
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
Disable
Function
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
RTD Module 2 #7
Type
Disable
Function
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
RTD Module 2 #8
Type
Disable
Function
Trip
Alarm
PROGRAM SELECTION
RTD Module 2 #6
Type
Trip
Alarm
RTD M2 #8:
Name
UNIT
Disable
Function
Trip
Alarm
RTD M2 #7:
Name
MAX
RTD Module 2 #5
Type
Trip
Alarm
RTD M2 #6:
Name
DEFAULT
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
Appendix B, MPS Set-Up Record
Page B-13
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
FUNCTION & SET POINT
RTD M3 #1:
Name
MIN
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
Disable
Function
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
RTD Module 3 #3
Type
Disable
Function
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
RTD Module 3 #4
Type
Disable
Function
Trip
Alarm
PROGRAM SELECTION
RTD Module 3 #2
Type
Trip
Alarm
RTD M3 #4:
Name
UNIT
Disable
Function
Trip
Alarm
RTD M3 #3:
Name
MAX
RTD Module 3 #1
Type
Trip
Alarm
RTD M3 #2:
Name
DEFAULT
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
Appendix B, MPS Set-Up Record
Page B-14
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
FUNCTION & SET POINT
RTD M3 #5:
Name
MIN
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Disable
Pt100
Ni100
Stator
Bearing
Stator Voting
Bearing Voting
Ni120
Cu10
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
Disable
Function
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
RTD Module 3 #7
Type
Disable
Function
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
RTD Module 3 #8
Type
Disable
Function
Trip
Alarm
PROGRAM SELECTION
RTD Module 3 #6
Type
Trip
Alarm
RTD M3 #8:
Name
UNIT
Disable
Function
Trip
Alarm
RTD M3 #7:
Name
MAX
RTD Module 3 #5
Type
Trip
Alarm
RTD M3 #6:
Name
DEFAULT
Stator
40
40
130.00
110.00
200
200
Load
Ambient
Load Voting
Ambient Voting
°C
°C
Appendix B, MPS Set-Up Record
Page C-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
APPENDIX C
MPS MODBUS PROTOCOL
C.1 PROTOCOL
C.4 FUNCTION CODES SUPPORTED
The MPS implements the Modbus® RTU protocol as
described in the Gould Modbus Reference Guide, Publication
PI-MBUS-300 Rev. B.
The communications system consists of a single master
and up to thirty-two MPS-CTU slaves connected using a
2-wire RS-485 network. If the master does not have an RS485 port, an RS-232 to RS-485 converter is required. The
converter must have automatic send-data control (SD). SD
control does not require hand-shaking lines since it uses the
data line to control the transmit/receive line on the
RS-485 transceivers.
Only the master can initiate a message transaction.
Messages can be addressed to individual slaves or they can
be broadcast messages. Broadcast messages are executed on
the MPS slaves but unlike individually addressed messages,
the slaves do not generate a reply message.
The MPS Modbus Protocol supports the following
function codes:
Read Holding Registers (Function Code 3)
Read Input Registers (Function Code 4)
Write Single Register (Function Code 6)
Write Multiple Registers (Function Code 16)
Command Instruction (Function Code 5)
C.2 MESSAGE SYNCHRONIZATION
Message synchronization is accomplished by detection of
an idle communication line. The communication line is
considered idle when no communication exists for an
equivalent delay of 3.5 characters.
The first byte received after idle-line detection is
interpreted as the address byte of the next message. Message
bytes must be transmitted in a continuous stream until the
complete message has been sent. If a delay of more than 3.5
characters exists within the message, the message is
discarded.
Response messages from the MPS are delayed by at least
3.5 character delays.
C.3 ERROR CHECKING
Modbus RTU uses a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check
(CRC). The error check includes all of the message bytes,
starting with the first address byte.
When a CRC error is detected, the message is discarded
and there will be no response.
If the CRC check is correct but the internal data in the
message is not correct, the MPS will respond with an
exception response code.
Function Codes 3 and 4 perform the same function in the
MPS.
Registers in Modbus start at 40001 decimal and the register
address generated for this register is 0.
C.4.1 APPLICATION LAYER
The hexadecimal system is used. Value representations
use the “C” convention. For hexadecimal, 0x precedes the
value.
C.4.2 READ INPUT/HOLDING REGISTERS (CODE 04/03)
The first byte of the read message is the slave address. The
second byte is the function code. Bytes three and four
indicate the starting register. The next two bytes specify the
number of 16-bit registers to read. The last two bytes contain
the CRC code for the message.
TABLE C.1 READ REGISTERS (CODE 04/03)
HEX BYTE
DESCRIPTION
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
Slave Address
Function Code
MSB Register Address
LSB Register Address
MSB Number of Registers
LSB Number of Registers
LSB CRC
MSB CRC
The two-byte values of starting register and number of
registers to read are transmitted with the high-order byte
followed by the low-order byte.
The CRC value is sent with the LSB followed by the MSB.
The following message will obtain the value of register 1
(Modbus 40002) from slave 1. Note that Modbus registers
are numbered from zero (40001 = zero, 40002 = one, etc.):
0x01 0x03 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x01 0xD5 0xCA
Modicon Modbus® is a registered trademark of Schneider
Electric.
Appendix C, MPS Modbus Protocol
Page C-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
The addressed slave responds with its address and
Function Code 3, followed by the information field. The
information field contains an 8-bit byte count and the 16-bit
data from the slave. The byte count specifies the number of
bytes of data in the information field. The data in the
information field consists of 16-bit data arranged so that the
MSB is followed by the LSB.
The maximum number of 16-bit registers that can be read
is 120.
C.4.3 WRITE TO REGISTER
Function Code 6 or 16 is used to make set-point changes.
C.4.3.1 WRITE SINGLE REGISTER (CODE 6)
The function code format for writing a single register is
shown in Table C.2.
The message consists of the MPS address followed by the
Function Code 6 and two 16-bit values. The first 16-bit value
specifies the register to be modified and the second value is
the 16-bit data.
Provided no errors occurred, the slave will re-send the
original message to the master. The response message is
returned only after the command has been executed by the
MPS.
The following message will set register 3 to 300 in slave 5:
0x05 0x06 0x00 0x03 0x01 0x2C 0x78 0x03
TABLE C.2 WRITE SINGLE REGISTER (CODE 6)
HEX BYTE
DESCRIPTION
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
Slave Address
Function Code
MSB Register Address
LSB Register Address
MSB of Data
LSB of Data
LSB of CRC
MSB of CRC
C.4.3.2 WRITE MULTIPLE REGISTERS (CODE 16)
The function-code format in Table C.3 can be used for
writing single or multiple registers.
TABLE C.3 WRITE MULTIPLE REGISTERS (CODE 16)
BYTE #
DESCRIPTION
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
.
.
.
Byte n
Slave Address
Function Code
MSB Register Address
LSB Register Address
MSB of Quantity
LSB of Quantity
Byte Count
MSB of Data
LSB of Data
LSB of CRC
MSB of CRC
The MPS will reply with the slave address, function code,
register address, and the quantity followed by the CRC code
for a total of 8 bytes.
C.4.4 COMMAND INSTRUCTION (CODE 5)
Modbus Function Code 5 (Force Single Coil) is used to
issue commands to the MPS. The format for the message
is listed in Table C.4 and the command code actions and
corresponding coil number are listed in Table C.5.
TABLE C.4 COMMAND FORMAT CODE 5
HEX BYTE
DESCRIPTION
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
Slave Address
Function Code
MSB of Command Code
LSB of Command Code
Fixed at 0xff
Fixed at 00
LSB of CRC
MSB of CRC
TABLE C.5 SUPPORTED COMMANDS
COMMAND
CODE
0x0000
0x0001
0x0002
0x0003
0x0004
0x0005
0x0006
0x0007
0x0008
0x0009
0x000A
0x000B
0x000C
0x000D
COIL
NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ACTION
STOP
START1
START2
Reset Trips
Set Real-Time Clock
Clear Data-Logging Records
Clear Trip Counters
Clear Energy Totals
Clear Running Hours
Emergency I2t and Trip Reset
Select Local Control
De-select Local Control
Re-enable Temperature Protection
Start Trace
Except for a broadcast address, the slave will return the
original packet to the master.
C.4.5 COMMAND INSTRUCTIONS USING WRITE
COMMANDS
For PLC's not supporting Function Code 5, MPS
commands can be issued using Write Single Register (Code
6) and Write Multiple Register (Code 16).
Commands are written to MPS register 6 (Modbus register
40007). Supported commands are listed in the COMMAND
CODE column in Table C.5.
When using the Write Multiple Registers function code,
the write should be to the single MPS Register 6. If multiple
registers are written starting at MPS Register 6, the first data
element will be interpreted as the command code but no other
registers will be written. If the command is successful, the
MPS will return a valid response message.
Appendix C, MPS Modbus Protocol
Page C-3
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
C.4.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES
The MPS supports the following exception responses:
Boundary Error (1)—Applies to writes of 32-bit
values. The high-order word must be written first
followed by the write to the low-order word. If this
sequence is not followed, a Boundary Error is returned
and the value will not stored. This does not apply on
read requests.
Address Error (2)—All accesses to communication
registers must be within the specified address range or
the Address Error code is returned.
Command Error (3)—This error code is returned if the
command code is not supported.
Illegal Function Code (4)—The function code (Byte 2)
is not supported.
The exception message consists of the slave address
followed by a retransmission of the original function code.
The function code will have the most-significant bit set to
indicate an error. The 8-bit byte following the function code
is the exception response code. The 16-bit CRC is at the end
of the message.
C.5.2 CUSTOM DATA ACCESS
Data access can be customized with the User-Defined
Registers and the User-Data Registers.
User-Defined Registers are located in non-volatile
memory and contain the register numbers from which data is
required. To access the data, read the corresponding UserData Registers.
The format of the User Data is a function of the
corresponding register entered in the User-Defined-Register
area.
C.6 NETWORK TIMEOUT
The MPS can be configured to trip or alarm on a network
timeout using the Setup Hardware Network Comms menu.
The Net Trip Action and Net Alarm Action set points set the
actions to be taken when a timeout occurs. To prevent a
timeout, a valid message, addressed to the slave, must be
received at time intervals less than five seconds.
NOTE: Set protocol to None before selecting Network Error
actions; then, select protocol.
C.5 MPS DATABASE
C.7 SPECIFICATIONS
Appendix E contains the Modbus Register in the
Communications Database Table. The table starts at register
0 (Modbus 40001) and each register is 16-bits wide. Types
“long” and “float” are 32-bit values. For both long and float
types, the low-order word is transmitted first followed by the
high-order word. Word values have the high byte followed
by the low byte. Float types as per IEEE 754 Floating-Point
Standard. All bytes of long and float types must be written
using one message or an error will result. This does not apply
for read commands.
Interface ........................................ Isolated RS-485, 2-wire,
multi-drop, half duplex.
Protocol......................................... Modbus RTU
Baud Rate ..................................... 1,200 to 19,200 bit/s(3)
Bit Format..................................... 8 bits, no parity, one stop
bit(1)
Number of CTU's Connected ...... Maximum of 32 units
Bus length ..................................... 1,200 m (4,000’) total(2)
C.5.1 DATA RECORDS
Only one event record can be read at a time. Record data
is for the record indicated by the Record Selector. To select
a record, write the record number to Record Selector and then
read the values in the record. Record Head points to the next
available record. The last event record captured is at Record
Head minus one.
Both Record Selector and Record Head values are in the
range of 0 to 63. Values outside this range will select
record 0.
(1)
Terminal “-” is negative with respect to terminal “+” for
a binary 1 (MARK or OFF) state.
Terminal “-” is positive with respect to terminal “+” for a
binary 0 (SPACE or ON) state.
(2)
For line lengths exceeding 10 m (30’), 150- terminations
are required at the cable ends.
(3)
Error rate is 1 byte/120 kB at 19,200 bit/s. For high
reliability, use 9600 bit/s.
Appendix C, MPS Modbus Protocol
MPS Motor Protection System
Page C-4
Rev. 6-E-030116
This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix C, MPS Modbus Protocol
Page D-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
APPENDIX D
MPS A-B DF1 PROTOCOL
D.1 PROTOCOL
D.2 PLC-5 / SLC 500 CHANNEL-0 SETUP
®
The MPS A-B Protocol is based on the half-duplex
master/slave Allen-Bradley (A-B) Data Highway Protocol
(DF1) as described in Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1770-6.5.16
October 1996. This publication is available from the A-B
web site at www.ab.com.
The communications system consists of a single master
and up to thirty-two slaves connected to a 2-wire
RS-485 multi-drop network. MPS Control Units are slave
devices on this network.
If the master does not have an RS-485 port, an RS-232
to RS-485 converter is required. The RS-485 converter
should have automatic send-data control (SD). SD control
does not require handshaking lines since it uses the data
line to control the RS-485 transmitter.
The
SE-485-DIN converter is recommended. It includes
optical isolation and baud rate selections from 9,600 to
57,600 bits per second. For additional information on
converters, see Technical Information TI 9.9.
The MPS supports the DF1 commands shown in
Table D.1. Each PLC has limitations when using a
particular command. Determine the best command to use
for a particular application.
COMMAND
TABLE D.1 DF1 COMMANDS
CMD
Unprotected Read
Unprotected Write
Typed Read
Typed Write
Typed Logical Read
Typed Logical Write
01
08
0F
0F
0F
0F
FNC
68
67
A2
AA
The PLC-5 and SLC 500 support reading and writing to
integer files (Type N) and float files (Type F). Since MPS
meter values are float types, these will typically be stored
in a PLC Type-F file. It is also possible to read float types
from the MPS as two integers; however, further processing
is required to obtain the float value.
The PLC requires two communication ports—a PLC
programming port and an MPS communications port.
Typically, a DH+ port will be used for PLC programming
and the RS-232 port is used for MPS communications via
an SE-485-DIN converter.
The RS-232 Channel-0 port is set up for a DF1 halfduplex master. Set the Channel-0 baud rate and CRC to
match the MPS settings. The parity bit is not supported on
the MPS. Where applicable, set Reply Message Wait to
100 ms.
Additional recommended PLC settings:
DF1 Retries = 3
RTS Send Delay = 1 (20 ms)
RTS Off Delay = 0
Ack timeout = 5 (100 ms)
Reply msg wait = 3 (60 ms)
For the polling mode, select MESSAGE BASED (DO
NOT ALLOW SLAVE TO INITIATE MESSAGES) or
STANDARD (MULTIPLE MESSAGE-TRANSFER PER
NODE SCAN). The MPS can buffer up to 3 messages.
The selection MESSAGE BASED (DO NOT ALLOW
SLAVE TO INITIATE MESSAGES) is recommended.
D.3 TYPED-READ
The Typed-Read message is used to read data from the
MPS. The Typed-Read message requires a Control Block
where the message configuration is stored. In the SLC, this
is normally N7:0 but could be any other file that supports
the control-block data. Use the following MSG settings:
Read/Write:
Target Device:
Local/Remote:
Control Block:
Read
PLC5 of SLC for SLC500 or Control
Logix
Local
N7:0
NOTE: For the PLC-5, the message block must be of type
MG so that the channel number can be set in the message
setup screen.
The Setup screen is used to specify file information. In
the This Controller section, Data Table Address is the
destination in the PLC where data is to be stored. This can
be a float (Fx:x) file or an integer (Nx:x) file. Element Size
must be set to the number of elements to transfer. This is
a decimal value and this value is limited in some
controllers. In the SLC 500, the maximum value for
integers is 100 and for floats it is 50.
A-B® is a registered trademark of Rockwell International
Corporation.
Appendix D, MPS A-B DF1 Protocol
Page D-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
In Target Device, set Data Table Address to the A-B File
address listed in Appendix E. The A-B File in Appendix E
is coded as FILE:ELEMENT. To read or write the element
as
floats,
the
PLC-5
address
would
be
<F><FILE>:<ELEMENT> (Example F9:222). To read or
write the element as integers, add 20 to the file number and
preceed with N, <N><FILE+20>:<ELEMENT> (Example
N29:222). Local Address is the MPS address.
Example settings for reading 25 registers as float type
(25 meter readings):
Data Table Address: ..... F8:0
Element Size:................ 25
Target Device Data
Table Address:.......... F6:0
Local Address:.............. 9 (Must match MPS setting)
NOTE: To read float values, both data table addresses must
be specified as float (F) type.
Example settings for reading a block of 100 registers
(16-bit integer):
This could be a mix of float and integer values since
floats can be transferred as two integers in the MPS.
Data Table Address: ..... N9:0
Element Size:................ 100
Target Device Data
Table Address:.......... N23:264 (Start of Digital
Inputs)
Local Address:.............. 9 (Must match MPS setting)
If an MPS float has been read into the PLC as two
integers and stored in an N-type file, the float can be
recovered by using two copy commands. Assume that the
two integers from the MPS read command are stored in
N9:0 and N9:1. The first copy command is used to swap
the two words so they are in the correct order; copy N9:0
to N9:11, and copy N9:1 to N9:10. The second copy
command will copy the two integers to the F-type file; copy
N9:10 to F8:0 with a size of 1. The two integers are now
combined correctly as a single 4-byte float located in F8:0.
D.4 TYPED-WRITE
The Typed-Write message is used to write data to the
MPS.
Read/Write:
Target Device:
Local/Remote:
Control Block:
Write
PLC5 or SLC for SLC500 or Control
Logix
Local
N7:0
The Setup screen is used to specify file information. In
the This Controller section, Data Table Address is the
source file in the SLC. This can be a float (Fx:x) file or an
integer (Nx:x) file. Element Size must be set to the number
of elements to transfer. For the MPS, the maximum
element size is 100 for integers and 50 for floats.
In Target Device, set Data Table Address to the A-B File
address listed in Appendix E. Both integer and float values
sent from the SLC are in the correct byte order and
interpreted correctly by the MPS. The MPS will do a range
check on all messages to ensure valid data.
Local Address is the MPS address.
Example settings for writing a single float to set the FLA
Rating:
Data-Table Address: .....F8:0 (Location of FLA value)
Element Size: ................1
Target-Device DataTable Address: ..........F3:225
Local Address: ..............9 (Must match MPS setting)
Reset commands to the MPS are issued by writing an
integer command code to MPS Register 6 (N23:6)
A command message should only be issued when the
command is required.
Valid commands are shown Table D.2.
TABLE D.2 MPS COMMANDS
COMMAND CODE ACTION
0x0000
0x0001
0x0002
0x0003
0x0004
0x0005
0x0006
0x0007
0x0008
0x0009
0x000A
0x000B
0x000C
0x000D
STOP
START1
START2
Reset Trips
Set Real-Time Clock
Clear Data-Logging Records
Clear Trip Counters
Clear Energy Totals
Clear Running Hours
Emergency I2t and Trip Reset
Select Local Control
De-select Local Control
Re-enable Temperature Protection
Start Trace
Example settings for writing an MPS reset command.
Data-Table Address: .....N9:0 (Reset code = 3)
Element Size: ................1
Target-Device DataTable Address: ..........N23:6 (MPS Command
Register location)
Local Address: ..............9 (Must match MPS setting)
Appendix D, MPS A-B DF1 Protocol
Page D-3
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
D.5 UNPROTECTED READ/WRITE
D.9 NETWORK TIMEOUT
For PLC-2 and PLC-3 processors not supporting Typed
Read/Write messages, Unprotected Read/Write commands
can be used. For these messages, the data address is the
Octal value of the MPS Register in Appendix E. The size
is the number of registers. The maximum number of
registers that can be transferred in a single message is 100.
Unprotected Read/Write commands are used by the SEComm-MPS communication program.
The MPS can be configured to trip or alarm on a network
timeout using the Setup Hardware Network Comms menu.
The Net Trip Action and Net Alarm Action set points set the
actions to be taken when a timeout occurs. To prevent a
timeout, a valid message, addressed to the slave, must be
received at time intervals less than five seconds.
NOTE: Set protocol to None before selecting Network Error
actions; then, select protocol.
D.6 TYPED LOGICAL READ/WRITE
The Typed Logical Read (CMD = 0F, FNC = A2) and
Typed Logical Write (CMD = 0F, FNC = AA) messages are
supported by the full line of SLC 500 processors and Prosoft
MVIxx-DFCM communication interfaces.
Both float (F) and integer (N) types are supported. Unlike
the typed commands in Section D.3 and D.4 a file offset is
not required for integer values. Use the A-B file address as
listed in the MPS manual Appendix E and precede the
address with F for float values and N for integer values.
The maximum number of integers and floats that can be
read is 100 and 50 respectively.
Reset commands to the MPS are issued by writing one of
the COMMAND CODES listed in Table D.2 to Register 6
(N3:6).
D.7 DATA RECORDS
Only one event record can be read at a time. Data is for
the record indicated by the Record Selector. To select a
record, write the record number to Record Selector and then
read the values in the record. Record-Head points to the next
available record. The last event record captured is at Record
Head minus one.
Both Record-Selector and Record-Head values are in the
range of 0 to 63. Values outside this range will select
record 0.
D.10 SPECIFICATIONS
Interface ........................................ Isolated RS-485, 2-wire,
multi-drop, half duplex
Protocol......................................... Modbus RTU
Baud Rate ..................................... 1,200 to 19,200 bit/s(3)
Bit Format..................................... 8 bits, no parity, one stop
bit (1)
Number of CTU's Connected ...... Maximum of 32 units
Bus length ..................................... 1,200 m (4,000’) total(2)
(1)
Terminal “-” is negative with respect to terminal “+” for
a binary 1 (MARK or OFF) state.
Terminal “-” is positive with respect to terminal “+” for a
binary 0 (SPACE or ON) state.
(2)
For line lengths exceeding 10 m (30’), 150- terminations
are required at the cable ends.
(3)
Error rate is 1 byte/120 kB at 19,200 bit/s. For high
reliability, use 9600 bit/s.
D.8 CUSTOM DATA ACCESS
Data access can be customized with the User-Defined
Registers and the User Data Register.
Enter the required data-register numbers in the UserDefined Registers. The format of user data is a function of
the corresponding register.
To access the data, read the corresponding User-Data
Register.
Appendix D, MPS A-B DF1 Protocol
MPS Motor Protection System
Page D-4
Rev. 6-E-030116
This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix D, MPS A-B DF1 Protocol
Page E-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
APPENDIX E
COMMUNICATIONS DATABASE TABLE FOR V. 3.04
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
Model Information
0
40001
3:000
1
2
3
4
5
6
N/A
Overload
8
40009
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Overcurrent
32
40033
33
34
35
36
Aux Overcurrent
40
40041
41
42
43
44
3:8
3:32
3:40
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
TYPE
Model Code (201)
Software Version
Serial Number
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
T3
T3
T2 (Low)
T2 (High)
Diagnostic Code
DF1 Command Register
Read Only
Write Only
T3
T37
Trip Action
Model Type
I2t Start Inhibit
K-Factor
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Locked-Rotor Current
R/W
Locked-Rotor Time Cold
R/W
Locked-Rotor Time Hot
R/W
Cooling Factor
R/W
I2t Inhibit Level
R/W
I2t Alarm level
R/W
I2t Alarm Action
I2t Reset Type
R/W
R/W
T42
T33
T6
T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
1.5 - 10 x FLA T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
0.2 - 100 s
T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
0.2 - 100 s
T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
0.1 - 50
T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
0.1 - 0.9
T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
0.5 - 1.0
T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
0-7
T43
0-2
T38
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
1 - 15 x Ip
Trip Delay
R/W
0 - 10 s
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
1 - 15 x Ip
Trip Delay
R/W
0 - 10 s
0-7
0-1
0-1
0 - 10
T42
T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
T42
T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
Reduced Overcurrent
45
40046
3:45
46
47
Earth Fault
48
40049
3:48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Jam
64
40065
3:64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
Current Unbalance
80
40081
3:80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
Phase Reverse (I)
95
40096
3:95
96
97
98
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
TYPE
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
1 - 15 x Ip
T42
T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
Trip Action
Spare
Trip Level
R/W
0-7
T42
R/W
0.05 - 1.0 x Ie
Trip Delay
R/W
0 - 100 s
Alarm Level
R/W
0.05 - 1.0 x Ie
Alarm Delay
R/W
0 - 100 s
Alarm Action
R/W
0-7
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T43
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
1 - 10 x FLA
Trip Delay
R/W
1 - 100 s
Alarm Level
R/W
1 - 10 x FLA
Alarm Delay
R/W
1 - 100 s
Alarm Action
R/W
0-7
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
0.05 - 1.0 pu
Trip Delay
R/W
1.0 - 100 s
Alarm Level
R/W
0.05 - 1.0 pu
Alarm Delay
R/W
1.0 - 100 s
Alarm Action
R/W
0-7
Alarm Action
Trip Action
Trip and Alarm Delay
R/W
R/W
R/W
07
0-7
1 - 100 s
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T43
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T43
T43
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-3
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
Phase Loss (I)
99
40100
3:99
100
101
Voltage Unbalance
104
40105
3:104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
Phase Reverse (V)
119
40120
3:119
120
121
122
Phase Loss (V)
123
40124
3:123
124
125
Undercurrent
128
40129
3:128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
PTC Temperature
144
40145
3:144
145
Acceleration Failure—Underspeed
152
40153
3:152
153
154
155
156
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
TYPE
Trip Action
Trip Delay
R/W
R/W
0-7
1 - 100 s
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
0.05 - 1.0 pu
Trip Delay
R/W
1.0 - 100
Alarm Level
R/W
0.05 - 1.0 pu
Alarm Delay
R/W
1.0 - 100
Alarm Action
R/W
0-7
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T43
Alarm Action
Trip Action
Trip and Alarm Delay
R/W
R/W
R/W
07
0-7
1 - 100 s
T43
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Trip Action
Trip Delay
R/W
R/W
0-7
1 - 100 s
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
T42
0.1 - 1.0 x FLA T1(Low)
Trip Delay
R/W
Alarm Level
R/W
Alarm Delay
R/W
Alarm Action
R/W
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
0.1 - 1.0 x FLA T1(Low)
T1(High)
1 - 100 s
T1(Low)
T1(High)
0-7
T43
Trip Action
Alarm Action
R/W
R/W
0-7
0-7
T42
T43
Trip Action
Speed 1
R/W
R/W
0-7
1 - 100% FS
Time 1
R/W
1 - 1,000 s
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
1 - 100 s
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-4
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
Power Factor — Quadrant 4
166
40167
3:166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
Overvoltage
176
40177
3:176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
Undervoltage
192
40193
3:192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
System Ratings
206
209
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
TYPE
Speed 2
R/W
1 - 100%-FS
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Time 2
R/W
1 - 1,000 s
Speed 3
R/W
1 - 100% FS
Time 3
R/W
1 - 1,000 s
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
0.5 - 1.0
Trip Delay
R/W
0.2 - 500 s
Alarm Level
R/W
0.5 - 1.0
Alarm Delay
R/W
0.2 - 500 s
Alarm Action
R/W
0-7
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
1 - 1.4 x Vp
Trip Delay
R/W
1 - 500 s
Alarm Level
R/W
1 - 1.4 x Vp
Alarm Delay
R/W
1 - 500 s
Alarm Action
R/W
0-7
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
0.5 - 1.0 x Vp
Trip Delay
R/W
1 - 500 s
Alarm Level
R/W
0.5 - 1.0 x Vp
Alarm Delay
R/W
1 - 500 s
Alarm Action
R/W
0-7
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T43
Default Display
V-Connection Type
R/W
R/W
0 - 15
0-3
T96
T9
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T43
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T43
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-5
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
223
40224
3:223
224
40225
3:224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
Phase-CT Primary
R/W
EF-CT Primary
R/W
Input-Voltage Rating
R/W
Run-Mode Delay
R/W
Differential-CT Primary Rating
R/W
Ip Threshold
R/W
Screen Saver
Frequency
Full-Load Rating #1
R/W
R/W
R/W
System-Voltage Rating
R/W
Synchronous Speed
R/W
Spare
Spare
Service Factor
R/W
1 - 1.25
Full-Load Rating #2
R/W
1 - 5,000 A
TYPE
1 - 5,000 A
T1(Low)
T1(High)
1 - 5,000 A
T1(Low)
T1(High)
60 V - 600V
T1(Low)
T1(High)
5 - 120 s
T1(Low)
T1(High)
1 - 5,000 A
T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
0.1 – 0.5 x Ip T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
0-1
T6
0-1
T10
1 - 5,000 A
T1(Low)
T1(High)
120 V - 25 kV T1(Low)
T1(High)
10 - 10,000
T1(Low)
RPM
T1(High)
þ
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
OPI
237
238
239
240
241
Starter
242
243
244
245
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
40238
3:237
OPI-Loss Trip Action
Number of OPI’s
Control Enable—REMOTE
Control Enable—OPI
Control Enable—LOCAL
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0-7
0-2
0-1
0-1
0-1
T42
T40
T6
T6
T6
40243
3:242
Remote Start Sources—Digital
Inputs
Remote Start Sources—Network
Remote Start Sources—OPI
OPI Starts
Starter Type
Start Time
R/W
0-1
T6
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0-1
0-1
0-1
0 - 15
0.1 - 500
Stage 1 Delay
R/W
0.1 - 500
Stage 2 Delay
R/W
0.1 - 500
T6
T6
T6
T11
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-6
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
255
256
257
258
259
Current Transfers
260
40261
3:260
261
262
Digital Inputs
264
40265
3:264
265
266
267
268
269
DESCRIPTION
Stage 3 Delay
ACCESS
R/W
Backspin-Timer Enable
Backspin-Time Delay
RANGE
0.1 - 500
0-1
0.1 - 3,600 s
Transfer Type
Transfer Level
R/W
R/W
1.0 - 3.0 x FLA
0-1
Input 1 Function
Input 1 Bypass Enable
Input 1 Bypass Delay
R/W
R/W
R/W
0 - 19
0-1
0.5 - 100 s
Input 1 Trip Delay
R/W
0.01 - 100 s
274
275
276
277
278
279
Input 2 Function
Input 2 Bypass Enable
Input 2 Bypass Delay
R/W
R/W
R/W
0 - 19
0-1
0.5 - 100 s
Input 2 Trip Delay
R/W
0.01 - 100 s
284
285
286
287
288
289
Input 3 Function
Input 3 Bypass Enable
Input 3 Bypass Delay
R/W
R/W
R/W
0 - 19
0-1
0.5 - 100 s
Input 3 Trip Delay
R/W
0.01 - 100 s
294
295
296
297
298
299
Input 4 Function
Input 4 Bypass Enable
Input 4 Bypass Delay
R/W
R/W
R/W
0 - 19
0-1
0.5 - 100 s
Input 4 Trip Delay
R/W
0.01 - 100 s
304
305
306
307
308
309
Input 5 Function
Input 5 Bypass Enable
Input 5 Bypass Delay
R/W
R/W
R/W
0 - 19
0-1
0.5 - 100 s
Input 5 Trip Delay
R/W
0.01 - 100 s
TYPE
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T6
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T41
T1 (Low)
T1 (High)
T12
T6
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T12
T6
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T12
T6
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(high)
T12
T6
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T12
T6
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-7
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
314
315
316
317
318
319
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
Relay Output Function
334
40335
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
Analog Input
350
40351
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
TYPE
Input 6 Function
Input 6 Bypass Enable
Input 6 Bypass Delay
R/W
R/W
R/W
0 - 19
0-1
0.5 - 100 s
T12
T6
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Input 6 Trip Delay
R/W
0.01 - 100 s
Input 7 Function
Input 7 Bypass Enable
Input 7 Bypass Delay
R/W
R/W
R/W
0 - 19
0-1
0.5 - 100 s
Input 7 Delay
R/W
0.01 - 100 s
Digital Tachometer Enable
Pulses Per Revolution
R/W
R/W
0-1
1 - 120
3:334
Relay 1 Output Function
Relay 1 Mode
Relay 2 Output Function
Relay 2 Mode
Relay 3 Output Function
Relay 3 Mode
Relay 4 Output Function
Relay 4 Mode
Relay 5 Output Function
Relay 5 Mode
Relay Pulse Time
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0 - 20
0-1
0 - 20
0-1
0 - 20
0-1
0 - 20
0-1
0 - 20
0-1
0.05 - 10 s
T13
T14
T13
T14
T13
T14
T13
T14
T13
T14
T1(Low)
T1(High)
3:350
Analog-Input Function
High-Level Trip
R/W
R/W
0-3
0.1 - 20.0 mA
Low-Level Trip
R/W
0.1 - 20.0 mA
Trip Delay
R/W
.01 - 100 s
High-Level Alarm
R/W
0.1 - 20.0 mA
Low-Level Alarm
R/W
0.1 - 20.0 mA
Alarm Delay
R/W
.01 - 100 s
T34
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T12
T6
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T6
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-8
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
Analog Output
372
373
40374
3:373
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
ASD 4-mA Frequency
R/W
0 - 70 Hz
ASD 20-mA Frequency
R/W
0 - 70 Hz
Motor 4-mA Speed
R/W
0 - 100%
Motor 20-mA Speed
R/W
0 - 100%
Output Filter
R/W
0-1
Output Parameter
R/W
0 - 16
(See Register 856-859 for Analog Output Calibration)
Network and I/O Module Communications
374
40375
3:374
DeviceNet Producing Instance
R/W
0-9
375
DeviceNet Consuming Instance
R/W
0-4
379
40380
3:379
RTD-Sensor-Error Alarm Action R/W
0-7
380
RTD-Module-Error Alarm Action R/W
0-7
381
Network Alarm Action
R/W
0-7
382
Network Type
R/W
0-5
383
Network Baud Rate
R/W
0-7
384
Error Check
R/W
0-2
385
Network ID
R/W
0 - 255
386
387
Network Trip Action
R/W
0-7
RTD Module
388
40389
3:388
RTD-Sensor-Error Trip Action
R/W
0-7
389
RTD-Module-Error Trip Action
R/W
0-7
390
40391
4:0
Number of RTD Modules
R/W
0-3
RTD Type
391
40392
4:1
Module 1 #1 Type
R/W
0-4
392
Module 1 #2 Type
R/W
0-4
393
Module 1 #3 Type
R/W
0-4
394
Module 1 #4 Type
R/W
0-4
395
Module 1 #5 Type
R/W
0-4
396
Module 1 #6 Type
R/W
0-4
397
Module 1 #7 Type
R/W
0-4
398
Module 1 #8 Type
R/W
0-4
399
Module 2 #1 Type
R/W
0-4
400
Module 2 #2 Type
R/W
0-4
401
Module 2 #3 Type
R/W
0-4
402
Module 2 #4 Type
R/W
0-4
403
Module 2 #5 Type
R/W
0-4
404
Module 2 #6 Type
R/W
0-4
405
Module 2 #7 Type
R/W
0-4
406
Module 2 #8 Type
R/W
0-4
TYPE
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T6
T15
T82
T83
T43
T43
T43
T16
T17
T18
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T42
T42
T42
T19
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-9
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
RTD Function
415
40416
4:25
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
RTD Trip1/Alarm1 Setpoints
446
40447
4:56
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
TYPE
Module 3 #1 Type
Module 3 #2 Type
Module 3 #3 Type
Module 3 #4 Type
Module 3 #5 Type
Module 3 #6 Type
Module 3 #7 Type
Module 3 #8 Type
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0-4
0-4
0-4
0-4
0-4
0-4
0-4
0-4
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
T20
Module 1 #1 Function
Module 1 #2 Function
Module 1 #3 Function
Module 1 #4 Function
Module 1 #5 Function
Module 1 #6 Function
Module 1 #7 Function
Module 1 #8 Function
Module 2 #1 Function
Module 2 #2 Function
Module 2 #3 Function
Module 2 #4 Function
Module 2 #5 Function
Module 2 #6 Function
Module 2 #7 Function
Module 2 #8 Function
Module 3 #1 Function
Module 3 #2 Function
Module 3 #3 Function
Module 3 #4 Function
Module 3 #5 Function
Module 3 #6 Function
Module 3 #7 Function
Module 3 #8 Function
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
T21
Module 1 #1 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 1 #1 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 1 #2 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 1 #2 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 1 #3 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-10
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
Module 1 #3 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 1 #4 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 1 #4 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 1 #5 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 1 #5 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 1 #6 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 1 #6 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 1 #7 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 1 #7 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 1 #8 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 1 #8 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #1 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #1 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #2 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #2 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #3 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #3 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #4 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #4 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #5 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #5 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #6 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
TYPE
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-11
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
548
549
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
Module 2 #6 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #7 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #7 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #8 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 2 #8 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #1 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #1 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #2 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #2 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #3 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #3 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #4 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #4 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #5 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #5 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #6 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #6 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #7 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #7 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #8 Trip Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Module 3 #8 Alarm Level
R/W
40 - 200°C
Temperature Trip Action
Temperature Alarm Action
R/W
R/W
0-7
0-7
TYPE
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T42
T43
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-12
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
Hot Motor Compensation
550
40551
4:160
551
552
553
554
IRIG Offset
568
40569
4:178
569
570
571
Clock Reading
574
40575
5:0
575
576
577
Strings
580
40581
5:6
590
600
610
620
630
640
650
660
670
680
690
700
710
720
730
740
750
760
770
780
790
800
810
820
830
840
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
HMC Enable
HMC Maximum Bias
R/W
R/W
40 - 200°C
HMC Minimum Bias
R/W
40 - 200°C
IRIG Offset (Hours)
R/W
0 - 23
IRIG Offset (Minutes)
R/W
0 - 30
RTC Date
Read Only
RTC Time
Read Only
Clock String (Setting Only)
Password (First Four Characters)
System Name
RTD Module 1 #1 Name
RTD Module 1 #2 Name
RTD Module 1 #3 Name
RTD Module 1 #4 Name
RTD Module 1 #5 Name
RTD Module 1 #6 Name
RTD Module 1 #7 Name
RTD Module 1 #8 Name
RTD Module 2 #1 Name
RTD Module 2 #2 Name
RTD Module 2 #3 Name
RTD Module 2 #4 Name
RTD Module 2 #5 Name
RTD Module 2 #6 Name
RTD Module 2 #7 Name
RTD Module 2 #8 Name
RTD Module 3 #1 Name
RTD Module 3 #2 Name
RTD Module 3 #3 Name
RTD Module 3 #4 Name
RTD Module 3 #5 Name
RTD Module 3 #6 Name
RTD Module 3 #7 Name
RTD Module 3 #8 Name
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TYPE
T6
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T23(Low)
T23(High)
T23(Low)
T23(High)
T31
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
T22
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-13
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
Analog Output Calibration
856
40857
5:282
857
858
859
Meter Values
860
40861
6:0
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
Analog-Output Calibration (Zero)
R/W
0 - 1,000
Analog-Output Calibration (FS)
R/W
0 - 1,000
Ia (A)
Read Only
Ib (A)
Read Only
Ic (A)
Read Only
Ig (A)
Read Only
Vab (kV)
Read Only
Vbc (kV)
Read Only
Vca (kV)
Read Only
Apparent Power (S) in kVA
Read Only
Reactive Power (Q) in kVAR
Read Only
Real Power (P) in kW
Read Only
Power Factor (-1 to +1)
Read Only
Used Thermal Capacity (%)
Read Only
Analog Input (mA)
Read Only
Trend I2t (%)
Read Only
Positive-Sequence Current (pu)
Read Only
Negative-Sequence Current (pu)
Read Only
Unbalance (I) (pu)
Read Only
Positive-Sequence V (pu)
Read Only
Negative-Sequence V (pu)
Read Only
TYPE
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-14
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
Unbalance Voltage (pu)
Read Only
Motor Speed From Tach. (RPM)
Read Only
Module 1 #1 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 1 #2 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 1 #3 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 1 #4 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 1 #5 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 1 #6 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 1 #7 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 1 #8 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #1 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #2 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #3 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #4 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #5 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #6 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #7 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #8 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 3 #1 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 3 #2 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 3 #3 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 3 #4 Temperature(9)
Read Only
RANGE
TYPE
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-15
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
Event Records (6)
973
40974
7:0
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
Module 3 #5 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 3 #6 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 3 #7 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 3 #8 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Max Stator Temperature
Read Only
Max Bearing Temperature
Read Only
Max Load Temperature
Read Only
Max Ambient Temperature
Read Only
Min Stator Temperature
Read Only
Min Bearing Temperature
Read Only
Min Load Temperature
Read Only
Min Ambient Temperature
Read Only
Frequency (Hz)
Read Only
I2t Reset/Trip/Inhibit
Time (Minutes)(7)
Read Only
Number of New Records
Record Head (Next Record)
Record Selector
Record Date
Read Only
Read Only
R/W
Read Only
Record Time
Read Only
Record Type
Message Code
Ia (1)
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Ib (1)
Read Only
Ic (1)
Read Only
Ig (1)
Read Only
RANGE
TYPE
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
0 - 65,535
0 - 63
0 - 63
T3
T3
T3
T23(Low)
T23(High)
T24(Low)
T24(High)
T26
T27
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-16
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
990
991
992
993
994
995
996
997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
Vab (2)
Read Only
Vbc (2)
Read Only
Vca (2)
Read Only
Analog Input
Read Only
Current Unbalance (1)
Read Only
Voltage Unbalance (1)
Read Only
Start Time
Used I2t (3)
Read Only
Read Only
Module 1 #1 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 1 #2 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 1 #3 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 1 #4 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 1 #5 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 1 #6 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 1 #7 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 1 #8 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #1 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #2 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #3 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #4 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #5 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #6 Temperature(9)
Read Only
RANGE
TYPE
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T3
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-17
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MODBUS
MPS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
Underpower
1070
41071
7:97
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
Reversepower
1080
41081
7:107
1081
1082
1083
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
Module 2 #7 Temperature(9)
Read Only
Module 2 #8 Temperature(9)
Read Only
RANGE
TYPE
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Differential Current Phase A (A) (6) Read Only
Differential Current Phase B (A) (6) Read Only
Differential Current Phase C (A) (6) Read Only
Reserved
Read Only
Reserved
Read Only
Reserved
Read Only
Reserved
Read Only
Reserved
Read Only
Frequency
Read Only
Power—S (kVA)
Read Only
Power—P (kW)
Read Only
Power—Q (kVAR)
Read Only
Power Factor
Read Only
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
0.1 - 1.0
Trip Delay
R/W
0.5 - 500 s
Alarm Level
R/W
0.1 - 1.0
Alarm Delay
R/W
10.5 - 500 s
Alarm Action
R/W
0-7
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
0.1 - 1.0
Trip Delay
R/W
0.5 - 500 s
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T43
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-18
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MPS
MODBUS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
Status
1096
41097
8:0
1097
1098
1099
1100
Message Stack
1104
41105
8:8
1105
1106
1107
1108
Trip Counters
1130
41131
8:39
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
TYPE
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T43
Alarm Level
R/W
0.1 - 1.0
Alarm Delay
R/W
10.5 - 500 s
Alarm Action
R/W
0-7
Trip and Alarm Summary
Motor Status
Starter Status
Digital Inputs
Relay Outputs
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
T30
T28
T29
T35
T36
Message 0
Message 1
Message 2
Message 3
Message 4
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
T27
T27
T27
T27
T27
Overcurrent
AUX Overcurrent
Overload
Earth Fault
Current Unbalance
Voltage Unbalance
Jam
Undercurrent
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Analog Input High
Analog Input Low
PTC
Phase-Loss Current
Phase-Reverse Current
Phase-Loss Voltage
Phase-Reverse Voltage
Underspeed
Contactor Status
Digital 1 Trip
Digital 2 Trip
Digital 3 Trip
Digital 4 Trip
Digital 5 Trip
Digital 6 Trip
Digital 7 Trip
RTD Module 1 #1
RTD Module 1 #2
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-19
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MPS
MODBUS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
Running Time
1210
41211
9:0
1211
Energy
1212
41213
9:2
1213
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
TYPE
RTD Module 1 #3
RTD Module 1 #4
RTD Module 1 #5
RTD Module 1 #6
RTD Module 1 #7
RTD Module 1 #8
RTD Module 2 #1
RTD Module 2 #2
RTD Module 2 #3
RTD Module 2 #4
RTD Module 2 #5
RTD Module 2 #6
RTD Module 2 #7
RTD Module 2 #8
RTD Module 3 #1
RTD Module 3 #2
RTD Module 3 #3
RTD Module 3 #4
RTD Module 3 #5
RTD Module 3 #6
RTD Module 3 #7
RTD Module 3 #8
RTD Module 1 Comm
RTD Module 2 Comm
RTD Module 3 Comm
RTD Sensor
Start Time Exceeded
Display Comm
Stop (In Protection Only)
Lagging Power Factor – Q4
Underfrequency
Overfrequency
A/D
Network
Leading Power Factor – Q3
Starts Per Hour
Differential Module Trip
Differential Current Trip
Reduced Overcurrent Trip
Underpower Trip
Reversepower Trip
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
Running Seconds
Read Only
T2(Low)
T2(High)
kW Seconds
Read Only
T4(Word 1)
T4(Word 2)
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-20
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MPS
MODBUS
A-B FILE
REGISTER REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL) (NOTE 4)
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
Differential Module Meter Values
1224
41225
9:14
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
Underfrequency
1230
41231
9:20
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
Overfrequency
1239
41240
9:29
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
Underfrequency Alarm Action
1248
41249
9:38
Overfrequency Alarm Action
1249
41250
9:39
Power Factor Quadrant 3
1250
41251
9:40
1251
1252
1253
1254
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS
RANGE
TYPE
T4(Word 3)
T4(Word 4)
T4(Word 1)
T4(Word 2)
T4(Word 3)
T4(Word 4)
T4(Word 1)
T4(Word 2)
T4(Word 3)
T4(Word 4)
kVA Seconds
Read Only
kVAR Seconds
Read Only
Differential Current Phase A (A)
Read Only
Differential Current Phase B (A)
Read Only
Differential Current Phase C (A)
Read Only
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
30 - 80 Hz
Trip Delay
R/W
0.5 - 500 s
Alarm Level
R/W
30 - 80 Hz
Alarm Delay
R/W
0.5 - 500 s
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
30 - 80 Hz
Trip Delay
R/W
0.5 - 500 s
Alarm Level
R/W
30 - 80 Hz
Alarm Delay
R/W
0.5 - 500 s
Alarm Action
R/W
0-7
T43
Alarm Action
R/W
0-7
T43
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
0.5 - 1.0
Trip Delay
R/W
0.2 - 500 s
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-21
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MPS
MODBUS
A-B FILE
REGISTER
REGISTER (DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL)
(DECIMAL)
(NOTE 4)
1255
1256
1257
1258
1259
Starts Per Hour/Time Between Starts
1267
1268
1269
1270
41271
9:60
1271
1272
1273
1274
Differential Module
1277
41278
9:67
1278
1279
Differential Protection
1280
41281
9:70
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
Ethernet
1300
41301
9:90
1310
1320
Waveform Capture(8)
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
ACCESS
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Alarm Level
R/W
0.5 - 1.0
Alarm Delay
R/W
0.2 - 500 s
Alarm Action
R/W
0-7
Starts Remaining
Read Only
Starts/Hour Time Remaining Read Only
R0
R0
Trip Action
Alarm Action
Starts per Hour Setting
Time Between Starts
0-7
0-7
0-9
0 - 500 m
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TYPE
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T43
T3
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T42
T43
T25
T1(Low)
T1(High)
Module Enable
R/W
Module-Error Trip Action R/W
Module-Error Alarm Action R/W
0-1
0-7
0-7
T6
T42
T43
Trip Action
Trip Level
R/W
R/W
0-7
0.1 - 15 x Id
Trip Delay
R/W
0 - 10 s
Alarm Level
R/W
0.1 - 15 x Id
Alarm Delay
R/W
0 - 10 s
Alarm Action
R/W
0-7
T42
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T1(Low)
T1(High)
T43
IP Address
Address Mask
Default Gateway
R/W
R/W
R/W
Hardware Capable
R0
0-1
Trace Auto-Start
Sample Count
Channel Selector
Sample Index
Trace Date
RW
R0
RW
RW
R0
0-1
0 - 4800
0-6
0 - 4800
Trace Time
R0
Trace Trip Code
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
R0
R0
R0
T22
T22
T22
0 = Not Capable
1 = Capable
T6
T3
T107
T3
T23 (Low)
T23 (High)
T24(Low)
T24 (High)
T27
T3
T3
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-22
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MPS
REGISTER
(DECIMAL)
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
MODBUS
REGISTER
(DECIMAL)
A-B FILE
(DECIMAL)
(NOTE 4)
ACCESS
DESCRIPTION
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
Trace Memory
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
RANGE
TYPE
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-23
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MPS
MODBUS
REGISTER
REGISTER
(DECIMAL) (DECIMAL)
User Defined Registers
1400
41401
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
User Data
1432
41433
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
A-B FILE
(DECIMAL) DESCRIPTION
(NOTE 4)
ACCESS
9:190
User Register 0
User Register 1
User Register 2
User Register 3
User Register 4
User Register 5
User Register 6
User Register 7
User Register 8
User Register 9
User Register 10
User Register 11
User Register 12
User Register 13
User Register 14
User Register 15
User Register 16
User Register 17
User Register 18
User Register 19
User Register 20
User Register 21
User Register 22
User Register 23
User Register 24
User Register 25
User Register 26
User Register 27
User Register 28
User Register 29
User Register 30
User Register 31
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
9:222
User Register 0 Data
User Register 1 Data
User Register 2 Data
User Register 3 Data
User Register 4 Data
User Register 5 Data
User Register 6 Data
User Register 7 Data
User Register 8 Data
User Register 9 Data
User Register 10 Data
User Register 11 Data
User Register 12 Data
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
RANGE
TYPE
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
Range and Type defined by
user register value.
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page E-24
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MPS
REGISTER
(DECIMAL)
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
1458
1459
1460
1461
1462
1463
MODBUS
REGISTER
(DECIMAL)
41464
A-B FILE
(DECIMAL) DESCRIPTION
(NOTE 4)
User Register 13 Data
User Register 14 Data
User Register 15 Data
User Register 16 Data
User Register 17 Data
User Register 18 Data
User Register 19 Data
User Register 20 Data
User Register 21 Data
User Register 22 Data
User Register 23 Data
User Register 24 Data
User Register 25 Data
User Register 26 Data
User Register 27 Data
User Register 28 Data
User Register 29 Data
User Register 30 Data
9:253
User Register 31 Data
ACCESS
RANGE
TYPE
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
NOTES:
(1)
If the record type is START, these are the maximum values during the start.
(2)
If the record type is START, these are the minimum values during the start.
(3)
If the record type is START, this is the I2t used during the start.
(4)
The A-B File is coded as FILE:ELEMENT. To read or write the element as floats, the PLC-5 or SLC 500 address would
be <F><FILE>:<ELEMENT> (Example F9:222).
To read or write the element as integers using
PLC-5 Typed Read and Typed Write commands, add 20 to the file number and precede with N,
<N><FILE+20>:<ELEMENT> (Example N29:222). File offset not required for SLC 500 Protected Typed Logical read
and write commands.
(5)
Undefined registers in this table read zero. Registers greater than 1463 return error.
(6)
Starting with revision 2.3, differential-module data replaces RTD module 3 data. Applies only to event records.
(7)
If an overload trip occurred, reset time is indicated. If in an overload condition and not tripped, trip time is indicated. If
a start inhibit is active, time to inhibit removal is indicated. All other conditions indicate 0.
(8)
Trace Data are 16-bit raw values. These formulas convert the Trace Data to real values based on relay settings. These
are already applied in the COMTRADE files so additional conversions are not required.
Ia, Ib, Ic = Trace Value x CT Primary x 0.006285 A
Io = Trace Value x EFCT Primary x 0.00408 A
1 PT: Vab, Vbc, Vca = Trace Value x (Vprimary/Vsecondary) x 0.00042636 kV
{ Vbc, Vca are phase-shifted values derived from Vab}
2 PT: Vab, Vbc, Vca = Trace Value x (Vprimary/Vsecondary) x 0.00042636 kV
{ Vca is calculated from Vab and Vbc}
3 PT: Vab, Vbc, Vca = Trace Value x (Vprimary/Vsecondary) x 0.00043358 kV
{ Vab, Vbc, Vca are calculated from Van, Vbn, Vcn}
(9)
The following MPS-RTD error codes are supported:
-100 = No RTD Sensor
-90 = Open Sensor
-80 = Shorted Sensor
-70 = No Data/Module Communication Error
Appendix E, Communications Database Table
Page F-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
APPENDIX F
REGISTER FORMATS
TYPE
T1
C TYPE
Float
T2
Long
T3
T4
Short
Double
T5
T6
Short
T9
Short
T10
Short
T11
Short
DESCRIPTION
IEEE 32-Bit Floating-Point Number
Bit 31: Sign
Bits 30..23: Exponent
Bits 22..0: Mantissa
Float (High): Bits 31..16
Float (Low): Bits 15..0
32-Bit Integer
(High) Bits 31..16
(Low) Bits 15..0
16-Bit Integer
IEEE 64-Fit Floating-Point Number
Bit 63: Sign
Bits 62..52: Exponent
Bits 51..0: Mantissa
Word 1 (Least Significant Word) … Word 4 (Most Significant Word)
Reserved
Enable/Disable
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Voltage-Connection Type
0: No Voltage Input
1: 1PT
2: 2PT
3: 3PT and Direct Connection
Frequency
0: 50 Hz
1: 60 Hz
Starter Type
0: Protection Only
1: Full Voltage Non-Reversing
2: Adjustable-Speed Drive
3: Soft Start
4: Full Voltage Reversing
5: Two Speed
6: Reactor/Resistor Closed Transition
7: Reactor/Resistor Open Transition
8: Slip Ring
9: Soft Start with Bypass
10: Part Winding
11: Double Delta
12: Autotransformer
13: Two Winding
14: Wye Delta, Open Transition
15: Wye Delta, Closed Transition
Appendix F, Register Formats
MPS Motor Protection System
TYPE
T12
C TYPE
Short
T13
Short
T14
Short
Page F-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
DESCRIPTION
Digital Input Function
0: Input Not Used
1: Start 1 (N.O. Contact)
2: Start 2 (N.O. Contact)
3: Stop (N.C. Contact)
4: Starter RLYA Status
5: Starter RLYB Status
6: Starter RLYC Status
7: Starter RLYD Status
8: Interlock (N.C.)
9: Trip1 (N.C.)
10: Reset (N.O.)
11: Local Select 12: Local Start1
13: Local Start2
14: 2-Wire Start1
15: 2-Wire Start2
16: FLA2 Select
17: Limit1 Stop
18: Limit2 Stop
19: Reduced OC
20: Local Select +
Relay Output Function
0: None
1: Starter RLYA
2: Starter RLYB
3: Starter RLYC
4: Starter RLYD
5: Trip1
6: Alarm1
7: Trip 2
8: Interlock
9: Local
10: Current Detected
11: Run Mode
12: Starter Sequence Complete
13: Thermal Lockout/Start Inhibit
14: None
15: Watchdog
16: Trip3
17: Alarm2
18: Alarm3
19: Trip1 Pulse
20: Reduced OC
Relay Trip/Alarm Mode
0: Fail Safe
1: Non Fail Safe
Appendix F, Register Formats
MPS Motor Protection System
TYPE
T15
C TYPE
Short
T16
Short
T17
Short
T18
Short
T19
Short
T20
Short
Page F-3
Rev. 6-E-030116
DESCRIPTION
Analog Output Function
0: Phase Current
1: Earth Leakage
2: Thermal Capacity
3: Stator RTD
4: Bearing RTD
5: Load RTD
6: Ambient RTD
7: Voltage
8: Unbalance (I)
9: Power Factor
10: Real Power
11: Reactive Power
12: Apparent Power
13: Zero
14: Full Scale
15: Speed
16: Differential Current
Network Communication Type
0: None (Disabled)
1: A-B DF1
2: Modbus RTU
3: AnyBus
4: DeviceNet
5: Modbus TCP
Network Baud Rate
0: 1.2 kbit/s
1: 2.4 kbit/s
2: 4.8 kbit/s
3: 9.6 kbit/s
4: 19.2 kbit/s
5: DeviceNet 125 kbit/s
6: DeviceNet 250 kbit/s
7: DeviceNet 500 kbit/s
Error Checking (AB DF1 Only)
0: Not Selected
1: CRC Check
2: BCC Check
Number of RTD Modules
0: No RTD Module
1: 1 RTD Module
2: 2 RTD Modules
3: 3 RTD Modules
RTD Type
0: Disable
1: Platinum 100
2: Nickel 100
3: Nickel 120
4: Copper 10
Appendix F, Register Formats
MPS Motor Protection System
TYPE
T21
C TYPE
Short
T22
Char
T23
Long
T24
Long
T25
Short
Page F-4
Rev. 6-E-030116
DESCRIPTION
RTD Function
0: Stator
1: Bearing
2: Load
3: Ambient
4: Stator Voting
5: Bearing Voting
6: Load Voting
7: Ambient Voting
20 ASCII characters
Register +0: Char[0] and Char[1]. Char [0] at MSByte
Register +1: Char[2] and Char[3]. Char [2] at MSByte
Register +2: Char[4] and Char[5]. Char [4] at MSByte
Register +3: Char[6] and Char[7]. Char [6] at MSByte
Register +4: Char[8] and Char[9]. Char [8] at MSByte
Register +5: Char[10] and Char[11]. Char [10] at MSByte
Register +6: Char[12] and Char[13]. Char [12] at MSByte
Register +7: Char[14] and Char[15]. Char [14] at MSByte
Register +8: Char[16] and Char[17]. Char [16] at MSByte
Register +9: Char[18] and Char[19]. Char [18] at MSByte
A character value of 0 (NULL) will terminate the string and the following characters will be
ignored.
Ethernet address strings are of the form: “ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd”.
The MAC address is a hex string of the form: “hhhhhhhhhhhh”.
Date
Bits 31..16: Year in Binary
Bits 15..8: 1-12 Months in Binary
Bits 7..0: 1-31 days in Binary
Time
Bits 31..24: 0-23 Hours in Binary
Bits 23..16: 0-60 Minutes in Binary
Bits 15..8: 0-60 Seconds in Binary
Bits 7..0: 0-99 Hundredths of Seconds in Binary
Starts per Hour
0: 1 Start per Hour
1: 2 Starts per Hour
2: 3 Starts per Hour
3: 4 Starts per Hour
4: 5 Starts per Hour
5: 6 Starts per Hour
6: 7 Starts per Hour
7: 8 Starts per Hour
8: 9 Starts per Hour
9: 10 Starts per Hour
Appendix F, Register Formats
MPS Motor Protection System
TYPE
T26
C TYPE
Short
T27
Short
Page F-5
Rev. 6-E-030116
DESCRIPTION
Trigger Source
0: Empty Record
1: Trip Record
2: Start Record
3: ETR Record
Message Code
0: Main Overcurrent Trip
1: Auxiliary Overcurrent Trip
2: Overload Trip
3: Overload Alarm
4: Earth-Fault Trip
5: Earth-Fault Alarm
6: Current-Unbalance Trip
7: Current-Unbalance Alarm
8: Voltage-Unbalance Trip
9: Voltage-Unbalance Alarm
10: Jam Trip
11: Jam Alarm
12: Undercurrent Trip
13: Undercurrent Alarm
14: Overvoltage Trip
15: Overvoltage Alarm
16: Undervoltage Trip
17: Undervoltage Alarm
18: Analog-Input-High Trip
19: Analog-Input-High Alarm
20: Analog-Input-Low Trip
21: Analog-Input-Low Alarm
22: PTC Temperature Trip
23: PTC Temperature Alarm
24: Phase-Loss (Current) Trip
25: Phase-Reverse (Current) Trip
26: Phase-Loss (Voltage) Trip
27: Phase-Reverse (Voltage) Trip
28: Underspeed Trip
29: Relay-Status Trip
30: Digital 1 Trip
31: Digital 2 Trip
32: Digital 3 Trip
33: Digital 4 Trip
34: Digital 5 Trip
35: Digital 6 Trip
36: Digital 7 Trip
37: RTD Module 1 INP 1 Trip
38: RTD Module 1 INP 1 Alarm
39: RTD Module 1 INP 2 Trip
40: RTD Module 1 INP 2 Alarm
Appendix F, Register Formats
MPS Motor Protection System
TYPE
C TYPE
Page F-6
Rev. 6-E-030116
DESCRIPTION
41: RTD Module 1 INP 3 Trip
42: RTD Module 1 INP 3 Alarm
43: RTD Module 1 INP 4 Trip
44: RTD Module 1 INP 4 Alarm
45: RTD Module 1 INP 5 Trip
46: RTD Module 1 INP 5 Alarm
47: RTD Module 1 INP 6 Trip
48: RTD Module 1 INP 6 Alarm
49: RTD Module 1 INP 7 Trip
50: RTD Module 1 INP 7 Alarm
51: RTD Module 1 INP 8 Trip
52: RTD Module 1 INP 8 Alarm
53: RTD Module 2 INP 1 Trip
54: RTD Module 2 INP 1 Alarm
55: RTD Module 2 INP 2 Trip
56: RTD Module 2 INP 2 Alarm
57: RTD Module 2 INP 3 Trip
58: RTD Module 2 INP 3 Alarm
59: RTD Module 2 INP 4 Trip
60: RTD Module 2 INP 4 Alarm
61: RTD Module 2 INP 5 Trip
62: RTD Module 2 INP 5 Alarm
63: RTD Module 2 INP 6 Trip
64: RTD Module 2 INP 6 Alarm
65: RTD Module 2 INP 7 Trip
66: RTD Module 2 INP 7 Alarm
67: RTD Module 2 INP 8 Trip
68: RTD Module 2 INP 8 Alarm
69: RTD Module 3 INP 1 Trip
70: RTD Module 3 INP 1 Alarm
71: RTD Module 3 INP 2 Trip
72: RTD Module 3 INP 2 Alarm
73: RTD Module 3 INP 3 Trip
74: RTD Module 3 INP 3 Alarm
75: RTD Module 3 INP 4 Trip
76: RTD Module 3 INP 4 Alarm
77: RTD Module 3 INP 5 Trip
78: RTD Module 3 INP 5 Alarm
79: RTD Module 3 INP 6 Trip
80: RTD Module 3 INP 6 Alarm
81: RTD Module 3 INP 7 Trip
82: RTD Module 3 INP 7 Alarm
83: RTD Module 3 INP 8 Trip
84: RTD Module 3 INP 8 Alarm
85: RTD Module 1 Comm Trip
86: RTD Module 1 Comm Alarm
87: RTD Module 2 Comm Trip
88: RTD Module 2 Comm Alarm
Appendix F, Register Formats
MPS Motor Protection System
TYPE
C TYPE
T28
Short
Page F-7
Rev. 6-E-030116
DESCRIPTION
89: RTD Module 3 Comm Trip
90: RTD Module 3 Comm Alarm
91: RTD Sensor-Failure Trip
92: RTD Sensor-Failure Alarm
93: Thermal Lockout
94: All Defaults Loaded
95: Non-Volatile Memory (NV) Enumeration Error
96: NV Numeric Error
97: NV String Error
98: NV Event-Record Error
99: NV Used Thermal Capacity Error
100: Starter Trip
101: Display Communications Trip
102: Diagnostic Error
103: Trip Caused By STOP
104: Network-Communications Trip
105: Network-Communications Alarm
106: PF Quadrant 4 Trip
107: PF Quadrant 4 Alarm
108: Underfrequency Trip
109: Underfrequency Alarm
110: Overfrequency Trip
111: Overfreqeuency Alarm
112: PF Quadrant 3 Trip
113: PF Quadrant 3 Alarm
114: Phase-Reverse Alarm (Current)
115: Phase-Reverse Alarm (Voltage)
116: Starts per Hour Trip
117: Starts per Hour Alarm
118 to 127: Reserved
128: Differential Communication Trip
129: Differential Communication Alarm
130: Differential Trip
131: Differential Alarm
132: Reduced Overcurrent Trip
133: Underpower Trip
134: Underpower Alarm
135: Reversepower Trip
136: Reversepower Alarm
252: ETR Request (2)
253: Normal Start (2)
254: Incomplete Start (2)
255: No Trip or Alarm
Motor Status
Bit0: 1 = Motor current > Current threshold
Bit1: 1 = Motor in Run Mode
Bit2: 1 = Motor at Full Speed (Based on Tach Information)
Appendix F, Register Formats
MPS Motor Protection System
TYPE
C TYPE
T29
Short
T30
Short
T31
Char
T32
Short
T33
Short
T34
Short
T35
Short
T36
Short
Page F-8
Rev. 6-E-030116
DESCRIPTION
Bit3: 1 = Motor Current > 125% FLA
Bit4: 1 = Temperature Set Point Bypassed
Bit5: 1 = Reduced Overcurrent Operational
Starter Sequencer Status
1: Start1
2: Run1
3: Start2
4: Run2
5: Stop
6: Backspin Timer On
Trip and Alarm Summary
Bit0: 1 = Trip1 or Trip3
Bit1: 1 = Alarm1, Alarm2, or Alarm3
Bit2: 1 = Trip2
Bit3: 1 = Interlocks Not Valid
Bit4: 1 = I2t > I2t Inhibit Level
Bit5: 1 = Stops Active (STOP is Pressed)
RTC ASCII Character Setting String:
Format: YY/MM/DD HH:mm:SS
YY: 2-digit Year (Year 2000 - 2099)
MM: Month 1-12
DD: Day 1-31
HH: Hour 0-23
mm: Minute 0-59
SS: Seconds 0-59
RTC is updated when “Set RTC” command is issued.
Record_Head points to the next free record.
Subtract 1 to obtain last record.
Range is 0 to 63.
Thermal Model Type
0: NEMA
1: K-Factor
4-20 mA Analog Input Type
0: Metering Only
1: Generic 4-20 mA
2: ASD Sync
3: Motor Speed
Digital Input Status
Bit0: 1 = Digital Input 1 Valid
Bit1: 1 = Digital Input 2 Valid
Bit2: 1 = Digital Input 3 Valid
Bit3: 1 = Digital Input 4 Valid
Bit4: 1 = Digital Input 5 Valid
Bit5: 1 = Digital Input 6 Valid
Bit6: 1 = Digital Input 7 Valid
Relay Output Status
Bit0: 1 = Relay 1 Energized
Bit1: 1 = Relay 2 Energized
Appendix F, Register Formats
MPS Motor Protection System
TYPE
C TYPE
T37
Short
T38
Short
T39
Short
T40
Short
T41
Short
T42
Short
T43
Short
Page F-9
Rev. 6-E-030116
DESCRIPTION
Bit2: 1 = Relay 3 Energized
Bit3: 1 = Relay 4 Energized
Bit4: 1 = Relay 5 Energized
MPS Command
0: Stop
1: Start 1
2: Start 2
3: Reset Trips
4: Set Real-Time Clock
5: Clear Data-Logging Records
6: Clear Trip Counters
7: Not Used
8: Clear Running Hours
9: Emergency Thermal Reset
10: Select Local Control
11: De-select Local Control
12: Re-enable Temperature Protection
13: Start Time
Overload Reset Type
0: Normal
1: Auto Reset
2: Multiple-Motor Sequence
Language
0: English
1: Spanish (Not supported at this time.)
2: French (Not supported at this time.)
Number of OPI’s
0: 1 OPI
1: 2 OPI’s
2: 3 OPI’s
Starter Transfer Type
0: Time Transfer
1: Current Transfer
Trip Action
0: Disabled
1: Trip1
2: Trip2
3: Trip3
4: Trip1 & Trip2
5: Trip1 & Trip3
6: Trip1 & Trip2 & Trip3
7: Trip2 & Trip3
Alarm Action
0: Disabled
1: Alarm1
2: Alarm2
3: Alarm3
4: Alarm1 & Alarm2
Appendix F, Register Formats
MPS Motor Protection System
TYPE
C TYPE
T82
Short
T83
Short
T107
Short
Page F-10
Rev. 6-E-030116
DESCRIPTION
5: Alarm1 & Alarm3
6: Alarm1 & Alarm2 & Alarm3
7: Alarm2 & Alarm3
DeviceNet Producing Instance
0: None
1: 0x32 Basic Overload
2: 0x33 Extended Overload
3: 0x34 Basic Motor Starter
4: 0x35 Extended Motor Starter 1
5: 0x36 Extended Motor Starter 2
6: 0x64 Status/Meters/RTDs
7: 0x65 Status/Meters
8: 0x66 Status
9: User Registers
DeviceNet Consuming Instance
0: None
1: 0x02 Basic Overload
2: 0x03 Basic Motor Starter
3: 0x04 Extended Contactor
4: 0x05 Extended Motor Starter
Trace Channel Selection
0: Ia
1: Ib
2: Ic
3: I0
4: VA
5: VB
6: VC
NOTES:
(1)
All values are actual numbers unless indicated by “Bitx”.
(2)
Not a trip code. Used by event records to indicate a start record type.
Appendix F, Register Formats
Page G-1
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
APPENDIX G
MPS REVISION HISTORY
MANUAL
RELEASE DATE
March 1, 2016
G.1 MPS-CTU REVISION HISTORY
HARDWARE
MANUAL
REVISION(1)
REVISION
(REVISION NUMBER
ON PRODUCT LABEL)
6-E-030116
FIRMWARE REVISION
3.40
02C
June 8, 2015
6-D-060815
January 15, 2015
6-C-011515
June 19, 2014
6-B-061914
02C
3.20
6-A-101813
01J
02C
3.15
February 14, 2014
October 18, 2013
November 2012
(1)
(2)
3.30
02C(2)
02B
3.21
3.14
October 2012
02A
3.13
January 2012
02
April 2010
01H
3.11
3.05
3.04
3.03
3.02
3.01
3.00
2.90
2.80
At time of release.
Hardware Update R also released.
MANUAL REVISION HISTORY
REVISION 6-E-030116
SECTION 3
Section 3.2.1.2 updated.
SECTION 5
Ip Threshold setpoint added to Sections 5.8, 5.19, and 5.20.
SECTION 9
RCM Certification added.
APPENDIX A
System Config menu updated.
APPENDIX B
IP Threshold setpoint added.
APPENDIX E
MPS registers 220 and 221 added.
REVISION 6-D-060815
SECTION 4
RTD protection updated in Section 4.4.
SECTION 5
Section 5.24 updated.
APPENDIX A
RTD temperature menu updated.
APPENDIX B
RTD modules updated.
Appendix G, MPS Revision History
Page G-2
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
APPENDIX E
MPS registers 548 and 549 added.
REVISION 6-C-011515
SECTION 2
Figs. 2.8, 2.9, 2.10, and 2.11 updated.
SECTION 5
OPI menu updated in Section 5.24.
REVISION 6-B-061914
SECTION 1
Underpower and reversepower features added.
SECTION 5
Underpower (5.17) and reversepower (5.18) sections added.
SECTION 9
Terminal torque specification added.
Direct connection (Note 5) updated in Section 9.4.
APPENDIX A
Underpower and reversepower trip and alarm access added to messages and protection menus.
APPENDIX B
Underpower and reversepower protection set points added.
APPENDIX E
Underpower and reversepower added to communication database table.
APPENDIX F
Underpower and reversepower added to register formats table.
REVISION 6-A-101813
SECTION 1
Faceplate updated.
Series 2 features added.
HARDWARE REVISION HISTORY
HARDWARE UPDATE R
Updated opto-coupler relay drive circuit.
Updated non-volatile and RTC battery.
Update R can only be combined with hardware revisions older than 01J and 02C. It will be indicated with an
“Update R” label on the serial number label.
HARDWARE REVISION 02C
Updated opto-coupler relay drive circuit.
Updated non-volatile and RTC battery.
HARDWARE REVISION 02B
Power Supply: Power factor correction update.
Analog Module: ADC package changed.
HARDWARE REVISION 02A
Analog Module: Improved accuracy.
HARDWARE REVISION 02
Processor Module memory size increased.
Rev 02 required to enable waveform capture functionality.
HARDWARE REVISION 01J
Updated opto-coupler relay drive circuit.
Updated non-volatile and RTC battery.
HARDWARE REVISION 01H
Power supply updated.
Appendix G, MPS Revision History
MPS Motor Protection System
Page G-3
Rev. 6-E-030116
FIRMWARE REVISION HISTORY
FIRMWARE REVISION 3.40
Added Ip Threshold setpoint.
Integrated IP Threshold within current unbalance and power factor protective functions.
FIRMWARE REVISION 3.30
Added RTD Temperature Trip Action, Alarm Action, and ability to meter temperature information.
FIRMWARE REVISION 3.21
Underspeed protection can now be enabled after a motor start.
FIRMWARE REVISION 3.20
Underpower and Reversepower protection added.
Loss of network comms time increased to 10 s.
RTD temperature trip now occurs when temperature is equal to or greater.
FIRMWARE REVISION 3.15
HMC Compensation limit is set to 0.9 (90%).
Added feature to initiate MPS upgrade mode using OPI.
FIRMWARE REVISION 3.14
Fixed RTD reading for unused RTDs.
FIRMWARE REVISION 3.13
Fixed EtherNet/IP issue with Exp Msg.
FIRMWARE REVISION 3.11
Waveform capture added and RTD voting added.
FIRMWARE REVISION 3.05
DeviceNet I/O Assembly Tx queue size increased to prevent loss of data (only an issue with Assembly 0x64).
FIRMWARE REVISION 3.04
Added Default Gateway to Ethernet settings group.
FIRMWARE REVISION 3.03
Corrected OPI flashing problem.
FIRMWARE REVISION 3.02
Added delay in EtherNet/IP communications to improve performance during high-bandwidth communication.
FIRMWARE REVISION 3.01
Added Starts Remaining to communications.
Added Time Remaining until Start Inhibit Removal to communications.
FIRMWARE REVISION 3.00
Added Starts Remaining to meter values.
Added Time Remaining until a start is available to the meter values.
FIRMWARE REVISION 2.90
Added analog-output filter.
FIRMWARE REVISION 2.80
Added digital input selection “Local Select +”.
Added OPI start-source selection to LOCAL mode.
Increased tach gear-tooth number to 120.
Appendix G, MPS Revision History
Page G-4
Rev. 6-E-030116
MPS Motor Protection System
MANUAL
RELEASE DATE
G.2 MPS-OPI REVISION HISTORY
HARDWARE REVISION
MANUAL
(REVISION NUMBER
REVISION
ON PRODUCT LABEL)
January 15, 2015
6-C-011515
June 19, 2014
6-B-061914
October 18, 2013
6-A-101813
FIRMWARE REVISION
03A
1.60
May 2007
HARDWARE REVISION HISTORY
HARDWARE REVISION 03A
Display update.
FIRMWARE REVISION HISTORY
FIRMWARE REVISION 1.60
Firmware update to support new display and equivalent LCD version.
MANUAL
RELEASE DATE
G.3 MPS-RTD REVISION HISTORY
MANUAL
PRODUCT REVISION
REVISION
(REVISION NUMBER ON PRODUCT LABEL)
January 15, 2015
6-C-011515
June 19, 2014
6-B-061914
October 18, 2013
6-A-101813
02
December 2006
PRODUCT REVISION HISTORY
PRODUCT REVISION 02
New analog PWB and power supply PWB. Increased accuracy. Wider input voltage range.
MANUAL
RELEASE DATE
G.4 MPS-DIF REVISION HISTORY
MANUAL
PRODUCT REVISION
REVISION
(REVISION NUMBER ON PRODUCT LABEL)
January 15, 2015
6-C-011515
June 19, 2014
6-B-061914
October 18, 2013
6-A-101813
01
November 2007
PRODUCT REVISION HISTORY
PRODUCT REVISION 01
Initial Release.
Appendix G, MPS Revision History